Jump to content

The Balance Reborn: Struggle for Terra Nui


Ballom Nom Nom

Recommended Posts

gallery_42057_313_10653.jpg
Prologue
 
"We hold the power in our hands to make the world anew."
 
~~~

Morning came to the island of Kemet Nui.

Through the thick fog on the sandy, southern shore, one could almost make out the tall shape of a raft approaching. On a day like this, the normally-rough surf had slackened, so that the vessel moved toward the beach at a slow, leisurely pace. There seemed little on land to greet the oncoming raft — no Nui-Bauk were wheeling and crying in the sky; no Ohee were scuttling on the sand, and no Kofo-Kopen were buzzing over piles of seaweed and washed-up debris. This morning, the beach was silent, except for a thin wind which blew over it in wisps.

Not only that, but the fog was everywhere. It obscured the desert lying a few bio beyond the beach, and blocked out view of the small estuary which emptied out of a tributary of the Hapi River and into the ocean. Even the harsh, yellow sun, which normally glared down upon the black soil of the land, was not visible at all. In short, a thick gloom hung upon the coast, as if a dark fist had closed upon Kemet Nui.

As the raft came upon the stream of water and the adjacent sand, it seemed as though it was the first vestige of civilization encountering an unfamiliar, alien landscape, one devoid of all life, and of all sound. But as it ground its way up onto the packed sand, the empty echo of the thin wind was gradually replaced with a cacophony of eager, excited voices.

"As you can see, Toa, the acute X-ray vision of my mask has no problem navigating through this dense fog. Kemet Nui was ahead of us the whole time!"

With a thud, a small red figure wearing mahogany robes and carrying a fire staff stepped out onto the shore. Adjusting the visual magnification of his Noble Zalmex, Turaga Akito’s weathered, creased face broke into a wide grin.

"At last, I have returned! Oh, it feels so good to be on black soil once more!"

Behind him, Chompshi, Vrael, and the Toa Terra all stepped off of their wooden vessel and took in the landscape with eager eyes. Never before had these warriors been to the land the Toa Sah had liberated so long ago. Truth be told, the six Toa Terra were still rather naïve; but despite their youth, forty years of defending their land, and recently Punt Nui as well, had given them plenty of experience in new situations.

Nevertheless, they found nothing odd in the softly blowing breeze with no sounds to accompany it, or the fact that the beach was littered with small tracks in all directions. Tracks that belonged to no Rahi or Matoran — troglodyte tracks.

Attar, thoughtful as always, bent down toward the elder of Terra Nui. "Is it always this quiet on Kemet Nui, Turaga?"

Akito laughed, moving forward resolutely. "Not at all, my boy! This is only the southern coast. Once we near Tai-Koro, you will be hearing the lively jubilee from kio around! But come, the desert will be harder to traverse later in the day. We shall take the Hakeahu II up the tributary of the Hapi River." He pointed to the small flow of water which was emptying into the sea near where the raft had been grounded.

"Does that stream lead to Tai-Koro?" Heaka asked.

"Well, not exactly. This will lead to the aforementioned body of water, which meanders through the Farafa Dunes and past the Dahkla Oasis. That would make a good stopping point, actually, as we can load up on foodstuffs, fresh water, and supplies there. From the Oasis, Tai-Koro is only a few kio away. We should reach Turaga Atemu's village by midday, at least. Now come, we must be off."

With that, the Toa and Turaga boarded their vessel, and began moving up the stream. Tai-Koro, and the rest of Kemet Nui, awaited them. They did not know what they would find, but they were eager to leave the silence of the beach and the fog of the morning. Only adventure waited, it seemed.

Time would reveal how wrong they were.


Review

Edited by Ballom
  • Upvote 1
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 1

 

Hanak's eyes fluttered open slowly. Confused, he gazed at the worn stone ceiling above him, wondering where he was. Suddenly, he remembered where he was — the small Cavern of the Prophecy atop Mount Tongaru. Groggily, he planted his arms underneath him and hoisted himself into a sitting position against the wall. His limbs were still sore from the attack of the glowing crystals he seemed to have just endured. In fact, the energy from the crystals . . . Hanak paused. Turning his head downward from the ceiling, he looked at his body thunderstruck.

 

Where previously he had possessed a thick, triangular body covered with a single large plate of silver armor and short, stumpy legs ending in snowshoe-like feet, he now had a completely different body. His torso had become much longer and muscular, with overlapping sections of shining armor. In addition, the pathetic Torika legs had been replaced with longer, double-jointed legs with knees like a Toa's, ending in slimmer, more-armored boots. Raising an arm trembling in astonishment, Hanak saw his formerly stubby fingers had elongated into graceful manipulators. Likewise, his once gangly arms had become proportionate to the rest of his frame.

 

Still marveling at his miraculous transformation, Hanak turned his forearm to look at its underside. A thick armored section protruded from the bottom of his arm, with a small point jutting parallel to his hand. Examining it curiously, Hanak wondered what the device's purpose was. In response, a gleaming metal blade extended from the armor housing with a snick. Startled, Hanak cried out as shimmering fire engulfed the blade. Waving his other arm wildly around the blade, he attempted to deactivate the weapon.

 

Shut off, you blasted device! Hanak thought agitatedly. Immediately, the flame extinguished itself and the blade retracted into the armor with mechanized speed. Sighing with relief, Hanak stood up unsteadily on his new legs, taking slow, tentative steps toward the other prone Sharaku — for that was what he and his friends had undoubtedly become. Reaching Thukor first, he knelt and placed a hand on his comrade's heartlight. Finding it reassuringly warm and flickering, Hanak stood again and walked toward the exit of the cavern. His footfalls cracking the icy ground on Mount Tongaru, he circled the mountaintop to gaze at the rising sun. Surprisingly, it was early morning, meaning he and the Torika — or Sharaku, rather — had been comatose during the entire night.

 

Turning to check back on his companions, Hanak decided on a whim to test his innate power of acceleration. Breaking into a run, the falling snow around him stopped in the air, suspended. Terra Nui seemed brought to a complete standstill as Hanak moved. Sprinting easily on his lengthened legs, Hanak ran in circles around Mount Tongaru, spiraling down toward the mountain's base. The activity barely required any exertion at all; his power seemed exponentially greater than it had been as a Torika. Sliding to a halt at the grassy bottom of Mount Tongaru, Hanak raised both of his hands before him palms up, willing himself to stop.

 

Remarkably, a circular blast of fire erupted from his palms, to scorch and blacken a nearby stunted tree. As the plant crackled and burned, Hanak chuckled sheepishly, then pivoted and began to retrace his steps back to the cavern. Staring at the grass beneath his feet, Hanak discovered that the extreme speed at which he had traveled had singed the grass and thrown a plume of snow three bio from the snowline. Smiling broadly, the Sharaku accelerated himself again and burnt another path near the flaming tree.

 

------

Upon arriving at the cavern's entrance, Hanak noticed that the other five Sharaku had awakened from their slumber and were examining themselves with varying degrees of incredulity. Thukor, as always, had a gigantic grin on his face, while Vukaz was looking at himself as if he had grown an extra head. Zanta and Kavan, likewise, seemed somewhat baffled, and had just discovered their retractable weapons. Finally, Rieka had recovered from her discoveries and was making use of her increased tunneling powers to dig a tunnel in the ice outside the cave. Popping out of her excavation briefly, she noticed Hanak and waved cheerfully.

 

"Hello, Hanak!" she exclaimed happily. "Isn't this amazing? I knew those gems in the cave were something powerful."

 

Hanak nodded. "Yes, we all seemed to notice that when entering. But — what of the prophecy? Is it unharmed?"

 

"Yes, it is completely fine," remarked Thukor as he stepped out of the cavern, "In fact the tablet loosened from the pedestal when the gems fell off. Here." He held up the tablet, which glimmered in the light of the sun.

 

"Excellent." Hanak reached forward and took it from Thukor's outstretched hand.

 

By now the remaining three Sharaku had followed Thukor and congregated around their leader. Vukaz folded his arms over his chest. "What are we to do now?"

 

Hanak stepped around to view Terra-Koro from the lofty vantage point of the mountain. Gesturing, he spoke determinedly. "We will return to the village and tell the Matoran what happened. Then, we will locate the Quntaino. Now it is they who should be cautious."

 

 

Review

  • Upvote 1
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 2

 

Meanwhile, the Johmai Jungle was also experiencing the onset of morning. In the emergent layer, understory, and ground floor, the sounds of waking Rahi were easily discernible. Not that they were doing much other than feeding and drinking: the Rahi of the forest had been pacified recently, having accepted the Quntaino as other creatures of the wild. Now, however, a new sound emerged, one of a rapid rolling locomotion.

 

A green armored spike ball crashed headlong through the ferns and brush. At first glance, it appeared to be nothing more than an oversized burr, with jagged, stiff spines jutting out at every angle. But the powerful legs and arms coiled up beneath the armor layer, and the bulbous red eyes glittering in resolve, revealed that this sapient creature, coiled up in a ball form, was on a mission.

 

He needed to reach the other Quntaino.

 

Snimurai was late for the group meeting to discuss their next course of action. The green bug-like being knew full well that his leader would penalize him for not arriving on time, and Argentaros was terrifying when he was enraged. Nevertheless, he rolled on.

 

Eventually, Snimurai reached a large clearing in the southern forest where the sun shone down in thin rays through the emergent layer. The circular area was mostly grassy except for a few sunken, moss-covered logs that lay on the outskirts of it. This area had been used by the Toa Terra when they had been trained by Chompshi and Vrael; now, it served a different purpose.

 

Argentaros stood in the exact center, his large clawed foot on an embedded rock, looking around at his dominion sternly. Around him, the other five Quntaino sat on the logs, patiently waiting to begin conversation when their last member arrived. Only Predacron was active: the blue being's attention had been grabbed by a large, protruding root, which he was now worrying with his teeth.

 

As a distraught Snimurai rolled into place and unfurled on the last log, Argentaros let out an annoyed growl.

 

"You are late, Snimurai." It was a statement, not a question. "I sent the message telepathically over ten minutes ago. Where have you been?"

 

Snimurai fidgeted, replying to the alpha Quntaino in the same complex Visorak dialect that he had been addressed in. "I just wanted to check on the village. I thought that the six beings we are trailing had returned, but they had not."

 

Predacron stopped his preening to sneer at him. "That's because they have already transformed! Last time I checked, they were still in the cave!"

 

Argentaros raised his paw, commanding silence. "Enough. It is true indeed that these . . . Sharaku, as they now call themselves . . . have just emerged from the Cavern of the Prophecy. They have found what the old one wrote, the ancient incantation that tells of our own rise. Now, however, we have reached a quandary. We have found ourselves face-to-face with an enemy that has reached a power equivalent to ours. The question is, how do we overcome these six Sharaku?"

 

Nosfernox slammed his forearm shields together and bellowed. "I say we crush them and pummel their bones to dust! Then nobody can stop us!"

 

"No. They must not be harmed, or that would defeat the purpose of fending them off. Seeing as how we are on the cusp of a new age, these Sharaku must be stopped — but not eliminated."

 

"Then what shall we do? Bury them underground in a sealed chamber?" Icrizahk scratched his head with a gigantic claw.

 

"No. I have a much greater scheme ahead. The Mask of Nature, as you know, has constantly eluded us, slipped out of our claws at every turn. I say we must attack these Sharaku and engage them in combat, and defeat them enough to keep them out of our way for a while. Apart from that, however, we shall need some fresh allies. These pacified Rahi lack the brains necessary to help us find the Zlinj."

 

Argentaros turned to Carcarinax, who sat with his arms folded across his chest, silently absorbing everything his leader had said. "Carcarinax, you have scouted out every inch of this island from the air, yes?"

 

"Indeed, Argentaros."

 

"Very well. Then we must journey to the heart of this rainforest if my plan is to work. There dwells the advanced Rahi society whose very language we have upgraded to. I have heard of a powerful ruler who manages her horde benevolently, and whose spidery brethren let none oppose them in this savage place. She goes by the name of Gorgorak."

 

Smiling like a Gatosuchys, his four-jawed mouth open in gloating triumph, Argentaros stood up and raised a new implement to the heavens. This strange living whiplash had been crafted by the leader from a small snake-like creature. Now, its ridged form writhed in the air, capable of changing form from supple and coiling to razor-sharp and rigid in an instant. "Then we shall gain these new allies, find the Mask of Nature, and free Terra Nui once and for all!"

 

With the roars, screams, and bellows of his team echoing his support, the silver being dismounted from his rocky pedestal. He turned to the red Quntaino, who had just finished sharpening his broadswords on a sharp piece of lava rock. "Daigolva, I want you to lead the others on this endeavor. I will remain here and continue my reflections. Perhaps then I shall discover how to better obtain the Zlinj." He gestured to the others with a clawed hand, then snapped his whip weapon in the air. "Now go!"

 

As the other six Quntaino flew, ran, rolled, loped, and scuttled off to do their leader's bidding, Argentaros turned toward the horizon and stared, his red crystal eyes reflecting the rising morning sun. Now, he would begin to solve the complex problem of the location of the Kanohi they sought. The prize that would lead to their victory.

 

Soon, all of this will be mine, he thought. Soon.

 

 

Review

  • Upvote 1
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 3

 

After a day of traveling north on the Hapi River, it had begun to rain heavily. Turaga Akito and the Toa had noticed the first small downpours begin around noon the previous day, as they had gone up the estuary and into the river's tributary, before finally reaching the main flow of water. To their right, a small hardwood forest emerged, with a few sparse trees farther off in the distance, on the other side of the river's second arm. To their left, the impressive Bekha Desert loomed forebodingly, its black sandy wastelands seeming devoid of most life. But in fact, the quiet, gloomy landscape of the morning, with no Rahi in sight, had been completely forgotten. Despite the harsh yellow orb of Kemet Nui's sun glaring balefully down upon the land, Rahi came out in droves to enjoy the rainy spell. Burnak could be seen in packs on the shore, while Ohee crawled through the marsh grasses and sedges along the riverbank. Nui-Bauk and Kofo-Kopen could be seen in the sky screaming or droning, occasionally coming down for a drink. In the distance, massive forms of the Serqet-Jaga could be seen rumbling along, and a lone Rock Raptor roar could be heard every once and a while. Once more, it was a peaceful, idyllic time.

 

After a day of heading down the Hapi, the Toa and Turaga had camped along the river's edge for the night, with Matoba making a small fire in a clearing in the brush. But they had been woken at dawn by heavy rains, which had extinguished their campfire and dampened their supply rucksacks. Akito resolved to keep moving, in the hopes that the rainstorms would soon abate.

 

Unfortunately, the sudden downpour had swollen the Hapi to deluge levels, causing the widened river to grind its way along with more turbulence. At first, the rugged raft had no problems getting along through the river.

 

"Is the river like this often, Turaga?" Matoba yelled at Akito, as the raft chugged along.

 

"No, not to my knowledge. With such arid clime, we have rainstorms like this on the island only once per decade, at most." The old Turaga seemed baffled at the suddenly worsening weather. "Still, the cataracts should not have enlarged much — or at least, I hope they haven't. We must press onward, for the Oasis cannot be much farther ahead.

 

Akito proved to be correct about the Dahkla Oasis, for soon Lyse's keen vision had spotted a lush green gem of land in the midst of the barren desert. The first set of rapids came up ahead, with not much of a height problem. The Hakeahu II crested it with little effort.

 

Suddenly, the Toa detected a huge rush of water looming up ahead. Pacha's Kanohi Ijuta picked it up immediately, causing her to become alarmed. "Heads up, guys, there's a big one ahead!" As the Turaga and the Toa looked in front of the raft, the cause of the monstrous sound became apparent.

 

The second set of rapids was a massive, roaring cataract, with multiple waterfalls gushing over tall, jutting rocks. The water plunged through a narrow junction to a wide basin of water ten bio beneath it. In short, this would be a mighty obstacle, one not even the raft might survive; and the deafening torrential rains rushing down around the Toa didn't help much either. Clearly, there wouldn't be much leeway to get through.

 

Akito dug his staff's end into a knothole in one of the wooden logs and yelled above the din. "Brace yourselves!"

 

As the raft ground perilously closer and closer to the monster rapids, it became apparent what each Toa was to do. Matoba and Chompshi were next to useless: the former hated water and his element was powerless against it, and the latter dared not risk electricity for fear of electrocuting his teammates. Turaga Akito was likewise not much help, as his Magma power was a similar handicap. However, the remaining Toa were working feverishly to halt the raft's momentum. Heaka was exerting her control over water in an attempt to slow the furious current, while Lyse created howling winds to push the raft backwards. Attar and Vrael were both using their elemental powers to freeze and crystallize the stretch of river, while Attar also expertly manned the tiller, guided by his Kanohi Ruusan. Both Pacha and Nuukor sat near the prow, shattering protruding boulders rising before them. Yet, all of their joint efforts only appeared to stall the inevitable, as the torrent steadily neared.

 

Suddenly, the greatest threat shifted to a gigantic pointed stone at the edge of the waterfall, obstructing the center of the river only seven bio away from the craft. Knowing shattering it with his elemental power would only rain shrapnel down on his friends, Nuukor shoved his way to the very tip of the Hakeahu II, barely activating his Kanohi Yovan before colliding with the massive boulder. His entire body changing into a metal alloy, Nuukor smashed into the offending block, pushing the rubble away from the ship with his outstretched hands.

 

Even as he did so, the Hakeahu II tipped over the precipice, Nuukor's enhanced weight dragging it down viciously. Screaming in panic, Turaga Akito and the Toa abandoned their efforts and jumped clear of their transport. Only Lyse remained on the raft, attempting to hold it aloft with his elemental power. Having tired earlier, his waning strength had little effect, and he soon fell with the others, exhausted. Seconds later, the river rushed up to meet them, as hard and unforgiving as iron. Sinking deep into the whirling maelstrom, the group was barely aware of the raft shredding upon impact above them.

 

Fading into unconsciousness, they drifted to a sandy shore, deposited alongside fragments of their provisions and splinters of the Hakeahu II. His eyes fluttering closed, Matoba blacked out. The last thing he was aware of was strong arms dragging him away.

 

 

Review

  • Upvote 1
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 4

 

Matoba awoke with a start. The last thing he remembered was being towed away by someone, and then blissful darkness. He had been enjoying a dreamlike, nether-worldly vision of him and Heaka by themselves when his head had hit the floor, causing him to be jarred awake. Sitting up, the blinking Toa of Fire took in his surroundings.

 

All of his Toa comrades were there, as well as Turaga Akito, who was ruefully rubbing his head and lighting his staff. Everyone had their weapons, and seemed to be unharmed and in good condition. They were in a large pyramidal tent of some kind, with a burlap material making up the sides of the dwelling. Wooden poles held up the top of the tent, and a small fire pit with glowing coals filled the center, a small trail of smoke wafting through a hole in the top of the tent. Matoba was pretty sure that neither he nor Akito had lit the fire, meaning that whoever had rescued them had to be nearby.

 

"Alright then, where are we?" Akito seemed baffled that someone had brought the team ashore in the middle of nowhere. "We can't be at the Oasis; that hasn't had permanent settlements for millennia!" He scanned the area with his Kanohi's X-Ray Vision, then stood up, motioning for the others to do the same. "Quick, someone's coming!"

 

The Toa Terra, Chompshi, and Vrael followed suit, weapons ready. But the being that entered the room was far from a threat. It was a blue female Toa, clad in ornate armor with forest green finishing, wearing a Kanohi none of the Toa Terra had ever seen before. She had a pair of broad protosteel wings coming from her back, and carried a pair of short swords. Her green eyes seemed kind, as if finding a raft full of strangers happened every day. Beside her stood another female, this one a Matoran. She wore white and gold armor and had a long cape draped around her shoulders. A strange staff was constantly at her side, and she looked at the party curiously through her Huna.

 

"You were right, Auset," the Matoran said in a soft voice. "They have awoken."

 

"Yes, my dear, telepathy never lies. Greetings, Toa and Turaga." The blue Toa bowed slightly. "I am known as Auset, and this is Nekhebet, Chronicler of Tai-Koro." The female Matoran nodded with a shy smile, while Auset continued. "It is imperative that you come outside. The others wish to speak with you."

 

As the group filed outside, Turaga Akito began musing thoughtfully. "Auset, Auset, that name sounds so familiar . . ."

 

Meanwhile, Chompshi had moved to the head of the group, and addressed Auset. "What others?"

 

 

------

In the center of the Dahkla Oasis stood a large lagoon of water, surrounded by tropical palms, ferns, shrubs, and flowers of unimaginable variety. Four tents had been built in a semicircle in the middle of a field, right across from the pool. Auset led the group to a campsite, where various tree trunks made up a pavilion of sorts.

 

As the group reached the campsite, a jubilant voice rang out. "Akito, is that you!?" The speaker was an old Turaga, brown and gray in color with dusty silver robes. He carried a carved wooden staff with protosteel plating, and his bent frame belied an age close to that of the Turaga of Terra Nui. His battered Noble Matatu bore the weathering of much strife, but the eyes in the craggy face were friendly.

 

"Atemu!? Thank Mata Nui that you are alive!" Turaga Akito rushed forward, embracing his fellow Turaga Sah in a mighty hug. The two old friends stood there for a minute laughing happily. Then Akito smiled at Atemu. "How have things been on this rock, my friend?"

 

Atemu's expression turned serious. He motioned to the Toa. "Sit down on the tree trunks. First, Akito and friends, we must introduce each other." Gesturing to Auset and Nekhebet, he cleared his throat. “I present the Toa Septiu." With that, five more Toa entered the clearing, sitting down in order around the Turaga. They then began the introductions.

 

The leader of the Toa Septiu was Ausar, a likeable black and red Toa of Fate. Then followed Heru, Toa of Gravity, Auset, Toa of Plant Life, Sutekh, Toa of Storms, Nebt-het, Toa of Sonics, and Anpu, Toa of Magnetism. No two Toa were alike: Ausar was boisterous and aggressive; Auset was gentle and mellow; Heru was a bit of a loner; Sutekh was nice but mildly ill-tempered; Nebt-het was small, easy-going, and loud; and Anpu was quiet and reserved. All of them carried exotic weapons except Nebt-het, whose hands were natural claws; and Anpu, whose pacifistic nature caused him to abhor the use of such devices, relying instead on his natural powers. In particular, the weapon of Sutekh, Tekhtekh, was a large, wicked-looking staff that made one shudder just to cast eyes on it.

 

After introducing the Toa Septiu, Atemu made the acquaintance of the Toa of Terra Nui. As it turned out, the Toa Septiu had been Matoran back when Akito and Atemu had been Toa on Kemet Nui. The Toa Sah had originated on Metru Nui, but had all gone their separate ways from Kemet Nui. Thus, Turaga Akito and Turaga Atemu hadn't seen each other in millennia.

 

"So it was you who pulled us out of the Hapi after our raft capsized," Akito said, after the Toa had become familiarized.

 

"Indeed, it was Anpu and Auset who assisted you," Atemu replied. "Auset recognized your distress using her natural telepathy. Now then, my friend, I hate to be the bearer of bad tidings, but you heroes have come at an inopportune time."

 

"You see, up until recently, we would have been in Tai-Koro, living a peaceful existence like you last saw on this isle. But unfortunately, we are the last refugees from our once-proud city. Tai-Koro, and the rest of the island, has been overrun by our ancient enemy."

 

Akito's eyes glimmered with anger. "The Betshu."

 

"Yes, the Betshu. These are a race of foul, ugly troglodytes who are more numerous than the sands of the black beaches. Their appearances divide them up into three kinds: Sebau, Samiu, and Nak. The first two breeds are nothing much to look at, although they can appear in swarms, but the rare Nak can best a Toa in certain situations." At this remark the Toa Terra grimaced.

 

But Atemu was not finished yet. "Worse yet, the Betshu hordes swelled to huge levels, captured Tai-Koro, and imprisoned almost all of the population in caverns beneath Kemet Nui. We were powerless to stop them. Normally these creatures would attack randomly and without coordination, but we now know that someone, something, was leading them."

 

Akito, who had been getting angrier at first, now seemed to have taken on a deathly pallor, realizing who Atemu was referring to. "Apep," he whispered.

 

Atemu stared sadly at the ground. "Yes, my friend, the Scourge has returned."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 5

 

As was his usual habit around midday on Terra Nui, the Green One was carving. The short, emerald being always found it comforting to ply his carpenter trade every now and then, as his solitary existence led him to need new supplies every now and then. Being firm friends with the Matoran was not enough — even though Wula would gladly give him new tools for free, he insisted on bartering items hand-to-hand in the ancient fashion. That, and the Green One daren't use widgets for purchases: he kept any of the shiny little trinkets he could find in a pile in his house, where he would croon over them occasionally.

 

Sitting on the porch balanced against the balcony, overlooking the peaceful paradise below him, the Green One was content, as usual. He had set out a pile of bread crumbs to feed the local Jierba and Gula, who were now eating happily in a small group beside him. As his trusty axe flicked back and forth, the Green One admired his handiwork. It was a carved brown wooden model of the six Torika, in a happy group hug. His friends.

 

Suddenly, however, a familiar voice caused him to snap out of his reverie. "Green One! Green One! We need you down here immediately!"

 

With newfound determination, the Green One put aside his carving, set out new crumbs for the Rahi, and grabbed a nearby hanging vine. With serpentine ease, he rappelled down the vine into the sunlit clearing below. He could sense the six Torika around him now, without looking.

 

As the figures emerged into view, he spoke. "Well den, fellas, have yous gots the stuff we was . . ." The Green One trailed off in amazement. For his friends were no longer Torika.

 

In their place stood six tall, proud figures with the stature and musculature of a team of Toa. Each had new, unsheathed weapons that gleamed with elemental energy. The Sharaku (for he could think of nothing else they could be) all radiated newfound power, as even the normally timid Rieka and the formerly-grumpy Vukaz had stern smiles upon their faces. In addition, almost all of them were testing out their improved powers: Zanta was teleporting himself dozens of bio into the air; Vukaz had summoned huge, shimmering force fields; Kavan was testing new, larger portals; and Rieka had been digging herself into the ground and back.

 

Grinning sheepishly, the Green One saluted his friends. "Well, I guess all went well, huh?"

 

Hanak stepped forward. He was the one who had called for the Green One, and had probably run there at supersonic speeds as well. "The Cavern of the Prophecy was unlike anything we ever dreamed of. It gave us not only a warning of things to come, but transformed us into Sharaku. Now, for once, we can truly combat the Quntaino." Hanak seemed more serious than ever. "We must return to Terra-Koro, and warn the Matoran at once. Who knows what the Quntaino could be plotting even as we speak . . ."

 

Almost instantly after Hanak uttered those words, the bushes nearby began to rustle. Whirling, the Green One and the Sharaku watched in horror as not one, not two, but six bestial forms emerged from the underbrush.

 

At the front of the pack of Quntaino, each of them bristling with weapons ready, Daigolva unslung his huge sword and snarled in Visorak at the heroes before him. "We meet at last, Sharaku."

 

Hanak, puzzled, turned to the Green One. "What did he say?"

 

The small being stared defiantly at Daigolva. "He says dat yous meet them at last, I tink."

 

Kavan, looking back at the aggressors, gave a reply. "Then tell them that they dare not harm the Matoran, or else face our wrath."

 

The Green One did as he was told in his Visorak dialect, and then told the Sharaku what all six Quntaino said in response. "We will not harm da Matoran, but yous stand in our way, and we will get through yous to get da Mask."

 

"Who are you?" Rieka seemed troubled by the Quntaino's fearsome reply.

 

"We are," Daigolva replied.

 

"What does that mean?" Zanta obviously found the Quntaino's remark strange. He stepped forward to inquire further, but that did not go well with the Rahi-like beings. Suddenly, they attacked.

 

The other five Sharaku and the Green One, however, were ready to meet them with weapons ready. As Daigolva brought his huge sword down, it was met by Zanta's pair of battleaxes. Teleporting himself directly behind the Quntaino, he let loose with a dual slice and air blast. Daigolva has to use his own claws to defend himself as the pair sprawled. Though the red Quntaino was powerful and heavily muscled, Zanta's agility and smaller stature were an equal match for him.

 

Elsewhere, Hanak had lit his fire swords and was dueling with Carcarinax. Rieka had partially-buried Icrizahk with her tunnels, and was fending off the colossal claws with her own clawed weapons. Kavan had set up multiple portals to block Nosfernox's counterstrikes, baffling the hulking black Quntaino. Vukaz and Thukor had teamed up to surround Predacron with a large force field, which was constantly being shot with water and frozen in ice as the snarling occupant tried to slice his way through. But the most impressive of all was the Green One. He had seized a length of vinerope and was cracking it like a whip, using his axe to parry Snimurai's claw strikes. At one point, the pint-sized being flung the rope around Sinimurai's neck, and swung up to land on his back. Though the green Quntaino tried to dislodge him by rolling up into a ball, the Green One still hung on tenaciously.

 

After a while, it seemed as though the Quntaino were getting nowhere. Daigolva's plan seemed to have failed, due to the fact that the so-called "island" creatures had underestimated the strength of the Sharaku. Now, they were rapidly becoming exhausted. Having a furious Green One catapulting around like a demon was not helping, either.

 

"Regroup!" Daigolva yelled, causing all the Quntaino to cease their fighting and reform around him. The shaken reptilian being pointed a claw at the Sharaku. "This was but a test battle, to formulate your weaknesses. You will see us again — we can guarantee it."

 

With that, the Quntaino fled into the Johmai Jungle as mysteriously as they had arrived. Staring ahead of him incredulously, the Green One translated their foe's last remark. "I tink dat they's up to no good, but what? Vewy vewy mystewious dese guys are."

 

"Indeed." Hanak made sure that none of the Sharaku were seriously injured, in part due to Thukor, who was busy healing up several claw marks and scrapes. After he was finished, the group's leader pointed toward the direction of the village.

 

"We must hasten to Terra-Koro. Let us hope that the Quntaino live up to their word. After forty years, it seems that we are no longer at peace," Hanak said. "War has begun."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 6

 

"Who or what is Apep?"

 

The Toa Terra seemed confused at Atemu's announcement. They had never heard of their Turaga having had a nemesis of any kind. Furthermore, they were curious to know the exact circumstances of his miraculous comeback; and were eager to learn if it related to their own adventures on Punt Nui as well.

 

Atemu and Akito looked at each other, then spoke. Their voices, pained at the memories of the ancient strife, illuminated the entire story. "Over seventy-five thousand years ago, we were part of a team of Toa, along with eight others, and were known as the Sah. Having been heroes on Metru Nui for quite some time, we were totally unprepared when we received a distress signal from an isolated convent on a remote island in a distant dome that turned out to be Kemet Nui. As it was, a reclusive Holy Order called the Sisterhood of Het-hert had sent the signal from this place; for the entire Matoran population, which was small at the time, was being overrun by a new, evil, sentient faction — the Betshu. We came in due time, and soon all of us ten had engaged these Betshu in war. Mind you, training the Matoran for battle proved long and hard, and with us being foreign Toa, it took a long time to earn their trust. For thousands of years we struggled, and in the end, we had to face our nightmare, the demon Apep. We do not know what he is or where he comes from, but he is known as the King of the Betshu. Insane, fierce, terrifying, horrible, incredibly evil — all these describe him and more. He can assume any form he chooses, and his powers are far-ranging and many. He called himself an Atukam, whatever that means." The Toa Terra seemed horrified.

 

"Fortunately, by combining our powers, we Toa Sah were able to encase Apep in a granite tomb sealed in protodermis, located deep within the catacombs of our island. It seemed inescapable, at least at the time. The Betshu were defeated, hiding underground, not to return to the overworld without their leader. The few remaining Matoran had been freed, and they and the Sisterhood praised us as heroes. After this victory, we went our separate ways. As for the rest of our number, our six brothers and two sisters, we cannot say what befell them, only that we hope they are alive and well, happily leading Matoran in some far-off lands."

 

At this point Atemu took over. "For myself, I settled here, on Kemet Nui, while steadfast Khepera moved to Punt Nui. His assistant, a young Chronicler named Senko, had been instrumental in the defeat of the Vorukan troglodytes on that island. And dear Akito here was called by a vision to a paradise none of us had ever heard of: Terra Nui. For thousands of years, Kemet Nui prospered under my rule. Matoran of every element settled down to start new lives. In time, six of them even became Toa like the Septiu you see before you. Now after I had relinquished my powers, I took up the forge as a hobby. Having been a mask-maker as a Matoran, it was easy to create works of wonder. My crowning achievement was a Legendary Mask, the likes of which had never been known. I called it the Zlinj, the Mask of Nature. Now, Kemet Nui is a desolate place, far less opulent than the island of Terra Nui, which we had never truly connected to. Wise Akito would protect the mask far better than I, and it would in turn protect his verdant island home. So I ordered a statue of Mata Nui sculpted, put the Zlinj on its face, and had it shipped to Terra Nui."

 

Sitting back, Atemu surveyed the Toa Terra. "Now tell me, my friends, what has become of my mask?"

 

The Toa Terra and Akito exchanged glances. The eight heroes had never heard of the Mask of Nature's origins, but they knew very well what its fate was. Speaking in turn, the group explained everything that had happened in the last forty years. From the arrival of the Dark Lord and the Sharaku, to the coming of the new Toa, to the defeat of the invaders, to their crash-landing on Punt Nui and beyond, ending with their arrival on Kemet Nui.

 

"So as you can see, Atemu," Akito said, "we lost the Mask of Nature. When we were on Punt Nui, we met Senko, but sadly saw nothing of Khepera. Apparently a disaster had swept him out to sea eons ago. We fought alongside the Matoran, and defeated the Vorukaia and the Vorukan. In addition, we destroyed the Citadel and fought a strange Shadow Toa named Ballom. But the worst part was, we fought a being very similar to Apep. Her name is Aso, and she fled to Kemet Nui, we believe."

 

Atemu froze. When he spoke, it was barely audible. "Did you say . . . Aso?"

 

"Indeed. I had thought that she was on our side long ago, but I was wrong. What the Karzahni was she doing on Punt Nui?"

 

Seeing the puzzled expressions on the two teams of Toa, Atemu all but exploded in Akito's face. "Don't you see? We thought that she was the Makuta of this Dome and that she was our ally back when Apep was at large, but it turns out that they are in league together! In fact, I fear that they are of the same species! And you say it’s likely that Aso has been on Kemet Nui ever since she left Punt Nui?" Atemu raised his fists at the heavens in rage. "The Queen of the Betshu has liberated her King! That was why we were unable to stop his return!"

 

Akito had turned ghastly white. "Mata Nui! Apep and Aso must have overrun Tai-Koro, defeated you and the Septiu, and imprisoned the Matoran! Those Atukam are probably plotting a strike even as we speak!"

 

Atemu looked at his friend sadly. "A pity that the Mask of Nature was lost. We could have used it to our advantage. But all you have left is your old crossbow, your staff, and a few maps. What then, are we going to do now?"

 

Akito stood up, his mechanical eye blinking rapidly. Determination filled his aged face. "We will plan and then fight."

 

Nodding with similar resolve, Atemu joined his comrade. Together, the two Turaga went into the large central tent and disappeared from sight.

 

The Toa Terra and the Toa Septiu, alone for once, looked at each other. Nekhebet had quickly ran into the tent to join the Turaga, so they were left to their own devices. Lyse, desperate to start a conversation, turned to Heru and stuck out his hand in a friendly gesture.

 

"Nice climate-weather we're having, eh?"

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 7

 

The Sharaku, upon arriving in Terra-Koro, had wasted little time. Along with the Green One, they decided that it was appropriate for the other tribes of Terra Nui to know what they were up against. They had sent messengers from among the select Matoran band who had encountered the Quntaino with them to the various regions around the island that were home to the Matoran's allies: the Acko, the Necrovak, the Aquavak, and the Visorak. Now, the Sharaku were preparing an emergency meeting of the tribes to discuss how to deal with the omnipresent Quntaino menace.

 

Hanak and his team had set up the gathering area in the center of Terra-Koro. Turaga Akito's podium had been brought out, and a raised central platform had been made for the Sharaku and the Green One to address the present Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko. Of course, although the Acko were capable of understanding Matoran speech, few Matoran actually speak Acko, so both the Green One and another translator were on the spot. Pyar, the young Ta-Matoran, had taken up research of the sapient lizards since Matoba had become a Toa, and he made sure to stay near that group of representatives and translate what they were trying to say.

 

As the afternoon sun moved across the western sky, the delegates arrived. Hanak and the rest of the Sharaku immediately called the meeting to order.

 

"Clans of Terra Nui! We have called you to our village because of a threat which can no longer be denied or ignored. For the first time in forty years, Terra Nui is in a state of war." This caused a hubbub among the majority of the villagers, who had not been in the former Torika's inner circle, as well as among the Bohrok and Acko. "It appears that a new and previously-unseen enemy has appeared, which, based on evidence gathered by Zanta here, were born suddenly and inexplicably a week or so ago. During the last Festival of Diamonds, a lightning strike on Mount Tongaru demolished the shrine of Otasuva. And, though the laws of nature deem it impossible, the six keystones cracked open like giant eggs, revealing a new enemy."

 

"We call them the Quntaino, the keystone-born. There are six we have recorded so far, although the base of Otasuva was sufficiently cracked as well, so we must assume that there are seven running riot. Of the six we have seen, they match the colors of the keystones: red, blue, green, yellow, white, and black. They are bestial in appearance, with Rahi-like strength and speed. Not only that, but the Quntaino can apparently control Rahi to do their bidding and attack unpredictably, or even cause the eruption of Mount Tongaru, which occurred several days ago. We do not know the extent of their powers, but we do know that they have control over natural forces, and that they appear to be after the Kanohi that shares this ability — the Mask of Nature."

 

This caused even more of a murmur among the audience, for the tribes had heard of the mighty Zlinj as well, though they had assumed it had been lost.

 

Hanak continued. "For all we know, they already have the Mask and are planning something sinister involving it. How beings who cannot wear Kanohi can do this, I do not know. But for now, the Quntaino are active and dangerous. They will not hesitate to attack my team, and perhaps would not hesitate to control you Rahi species out there, or kill all of you if they had the chance. And I do know that they will not let anything stand in the way of their sinister desires. Therefore, you must all be on your guard."

 

The leader of the Acko clans, a leathery old chieftain named Hssirssih, waved his gnarled branch staff at the Sharaku, while a dutiful Pyar translated the hissing dialect as best as he could. "Why do we need to fear these Quntaino? If they mean their controlled Rahi no harm, what is the danger of their endeavors?"

 

Vukaz addressed the chief directly. "We do not know exactly, as Hanak said. But we must be careful. For all we know, the Quntaino consider themselves superior to other beings and wish to rule Terra Nui and enslave all of us. There is much that we do not know."

 

The Necrovak and Aquavak had been listening silently, sending telepathic statements to their Va. Each one had a Va to translate for them. The Necrovak and Aquavak Va now spoke up. "The safety of you Matoran and ourselves is important, of course. And having heard of these monsters, we will support you in fighting them off, if need be." They then translated the message to the quietly-rumbling Bohrok.

 

"Dat's good," the Green One replied, before turning to the Sharaku. "So da Bohrok are behind us."

 

"Excellent," Hanak said. He pointed at the Matoran in the crowd. "And what do you villagers think?"

 

"Without Toa, there is not much we can do," Machi replied, as his fellow Matoran added their own support. "You Sharaku are the next best thing. Besides, such grizzled veterans as myself have worked with you before, and seen the Quntaino firsthand. Whatever happens, you have us at your side."

 

After hearing some encouragement from Pyar, and after consulting with the Acko clansmen, Hssirssih consented as well. "Very well. If you Sharaku are warriors like you say, then we Acko will fight alongside you. Just like we did with Old Akito and his vassals, the Toa Terra, when fighting your former masters."

 

"I couldn't agree more," Rieka added. "After all, the Turaga trained the Matoran for battle in a few days to fight the Dark Lord's Drone horde, and you won! I'm sure that if any Rahi attack any of our strongholds, you will able to fight back."

 

"Yes," said Zanta, "but we had the Mask of Nature to rally the Rahi back then. And we didn't just have these guys, we had Magraka, and Visorak, and . . ." He trailed off with a puzzled look. "Hey, wait a minute. Where are the Visorak?"

 

The crowd immediately surged, looking around for any of the spider Rahi. And yet not a single Visorak could be seen.

 

"Ye gods!" Hssirssih exclaimed. "Perhaps the bug beings and the Quntaino are already in cahoots!" Pyar, having translated the chieftain's response, seemed equally troubled. "Where could they be?"

 

"I do not know," Hanak said. "Perhaps they did not receive our summons, which the Green One was supposed to deliver to their general area via a Gula tag. Or they do not wish to confront the Quntaino with us." He turned to speak with the other Sharaku. "The Visorak have been our allies. It is unlike them to join with the enemy."

 

"In that case," Kavan replied, "I suggest that we journey to the heart of the Johmai Jungle and meet with the Visorak horde leaders."

 

The Green One's face lit up in a mischievous smirk. "Goin' to da center of da jungle, yous guys is? Vewy dangerous. I've only been dere a coupla times meself. You'll need a guide."

 

"Very well, you can come with us." Hanak addressed the group. "Now that you have all been warned, we must be on a constant lookout for any trouble from the Quntaino. Thank you for your help. You should all return to your homes."

 

As the various Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko began separating and leaving the village square, Hanak led the Sharaku and the Green One off of the podium and toward the village road out toward the rainforest. "We must be on our way. Let's just hope the Quntaino haven't gotten there first."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 8

 

After some heated debate on how to properly free the imprisoned Matoran of Kemet Nui and retake Tai-Koro, the two Turaga had come up with a grand plan which they presented to the fourteen Toa. According to Atemu, there were three things of great importance that could be found in the area of the Sekhem plains, a broad grassland in the far northwest corner of the island. One was a sleeping Rahi of monstrous size, who could be found in a cave in an elevated area of the plain region. It was called the Kemet Nui Vatuka, a giant beast apparently made of solid rock, possessing unsurpassed power. Heru, it seemed, had stumbled upon the slumbering Vatuka many years ago, but had not dared to wake it lest he unleash its wrath upon the island. Atemu and Akito had proposed that a team of Toa who could exert some influence and control over this massive Rahi could convince it that the Matoran meant it no harm and the Betshu posed a grave threat to its existence. With the Vatuka on their side, the Turaga reasoned, some Rahi muscle would easily defeat their enemies.

 

The second two items of worth were a pair of mysterious vehicles that had been sealed away in a system of caves beneath the Cliffs of Manu, to the south of the plains. They were designated the Xcavator T7 and the Stryda T8, and each apparently had a sophisticated mechanism that made them intelligent and able to communicate with their pilots. One also possessed an archaic burrowing technology that would allow it to dig beneath the earth to reach the Matoran's prison, and each one could be piloted by a single Toa. Acquiring these vehicles would be even easier than allying with the Vatuka, for according to Atemu, Heru had found and acclimated himself with the Xcavator ages ago! Though Heru and Nebt-het themselves did not realize this, he quickly asserted that their prior experience with these vehicles would be to the Toa's advantage.

 

The Toa Terra and the Toa Septiu, after a bit of discussion, agreed with the plans. Two teams were quickly constructed consisting of five Toa each, while the remaining four Toa would stay behind at the Oasis to protect the Turaga and Nekhebet. Using an old seagoing vessel that had been hidden in the Dahkla's lagoon, the Toa would travel up the River Hapi and go around the island via the ocean until they reached the Sekhem Plains. Heaka's water powers would allow the vessel to go against the current, and they would be traversing a different branch than the one that the Toa Terra had previously been on. Then, the teams would split up once they reached their destination. Heaka and Auset, who were the most capable mariners of the teams, would guide the vessel to its destination, and they too would part ways to keep watch for each group, in case any marauding Betshu showed up.

 

Now, the teams had been dispatched, and were currently on their way. Team one, out to recruit the Vatuka, consisted of Chompshi, Ausar, Pacha, Nuukor, and Auset. The Toa of Electricity and Fate had decided that their two Kanohi powers of mind linkage and Rahi control would be enough to befriend the giant Rahi. The two earthen Toa's powers, on the other hand, would be used in case the heroes needed to subdue the rock beast. Auset would stand watch outside of the cave.

 

The Toa found themselves approaching a large rock formation near the apex of the Sekhem Plains. Wind whipped around them as they slowly walked up the steep, grassy hillside. As usual, the heat was relentless.

 

"Shouldn't be much further, I think," Ausar said, as he ground his way up the hill, holding his Kepesh up to his face to shield his eyes from the blazing sun. "I've been wrangling Rahi for so long, it should be easy to tame this monster."

 

"Perhaps," Chomsphi replied. "A monster it may be, but it could flatten us as easily as it could the Betshu. That's why we have Pacha and Nuukor, for backup." In response, the Toa of Stone and Earth nodded with big smiles.

 

"Yes," Auset said, "but let us wait until we actually find the Vatuka before we analyze how hard it will be to get it on our side."

 

After a few more minutes, the team had reached the rocks. They could discern a craggy mouth of what appeared to be a grotto cut into the stone. Chompshi lit his staff with a spark of electricity, holding it aloft as he led his comrades inside. Meanwhile, Auset stood guard at the entrance. Apart from the light, the cave appeared to be mostly empty, with only a few scattered ashes and the remains of a long-dead fire pit as any evidence of life. Apparently Heru had lived here as a Matoran thousands of years before. And yet he never would have imagined that he was sharing his home with a slumbering giant.

 

For a few moments, the only sounds were of the wind screaming outside. Then, without warning, a deep thunderous noise shook the cave, startling the Toa. It sounded like a humongous boulder rasping against a series of metal spikes, and it repeated ominously. As the Toa continued forward slowly, wary of anything that might happen, the cave suddenly ended in a large, circular cavern, the source of the emanating sound. But what lay in the center of the room was far more frightening than the reverberating groan.

 

"Mata Nui!" Ausar's bravado diminished slightly as he, along with the other three gaping Toa, beheld the might of the Kemet Nui Vatuka.

 

It was a massive black and silver specimen, lying on its side with its head towards them, heaving slowly with each breath. The sound of it rubbing against the cave wall, combined with a sonorous snore escaping its maw, was what had created the rasping sound. The Vatuka must have been at least nine bio long and three high, with a massively armored back covered in tall, craggy plates and pointed spines, tapering to a heavy tail studded with even more razor armor and a clubbed tip. The limbs, belly, and flanks were forebodingly muscled and covered in thick armor, quivering with each breath. Its wicked claws were incredibly sharp-looking, and its forelimbs looked as though they could tear Tai-Koro apart by themselves. But the head of the Vatuka was its most fearsome aspect. From the single razor horn rising from the center of it, to the pair of curving side horns like that of a ram Rahi, to the opened maw of spiky teeth and a long, toughened tongue, it seemed like something from a nightmare. This indeed was a beast straight out of legend.

 

"Just be on your guard, and don't make any sudden movements," Chompshi said. He stepped forward very slowly, keeping his lit staff aloft. Ever so slowly, he used his Honiara to touch the mind of the great creature, bidding it to awake from its epoch of hibernation.

 

Almost instantaneously, the Vatuka froze. Its head lifted up, and a great orange jewel of an eye lazily opened in front of Chompshi's head.

 

"Why hello there, curious stranger," Chompshi said in his most mellifluous voice possible, as he slowly began to activate his mask. "That's a good Vatu—"

 

Before he could finish, the Rahi stood up with lightning speed, its long tail thrashing. Raising its head high, it let out a blood-curdling roar at the Toa, exposing its teeth in great detail. Auset, frightened by the sudden sound, had run back into the cave to help her friends. Pacha and Nuukor had raised their weapons, prepared to use their powers to immobilize the Vatuka. Ausar and Chompshi, however, were already at work. The former had sent a mental probe into the massive creature's mind and was willing it to calm down, while Chompshi was projecting soothing thoughts into the Vatuka's brain.

 

For what seemed like an eternity, nothing happened. The Rahi roared mightily at the beings that had committed the grievous offense of waking it up, but did not move from its spot. Rivers of sweat ran down Ausar's and Chompshi's brows as they used whatever mental persuasion they had at their disposal. Eventually, however, the Vatuka ceased its roaring. The beast hunkered down, putting its head on its front feet and gazing calmly at the Toa. Slowly, Ausar made his way toward it, with his weaponless hand forward. The Vatuka did not move. Ever so slightly, he touched the craggy brow of the creature. When the Vatuka still gave no response, he stroked its forehead.

 

The Rahi, successfully pacified, gave the Toa a toothy grin. With sighs of satisfaction, the five Toa could not resist breaking out into smiles. "See?" Chompshi said triumphantly. "With a little kindness, it becomes nothing but an oversized Burnak."

 

"Now then," Ausar replied, "let's get down to business." Using his Kanohi Begasu's power to send a thought to the Vatuka that the creature could understand, the Toa of Fate described how to reach the Toa's vessel at the foot of the plains. He also suggested that the Rahi follow its new friends out of its home, so it could soon begin cracking Betshu skulls.

 

Giving a bark of delight, the Vatuka surged forward. With great strides of its massive limbs, it broke through the cave walls and began leaping down the plains at breakneck speed. The five astounded Toa had to scramble to get out of the cave and follow their Rahi comrade down to the waiting ship.

 

"One thing's for sure, Chompshi," Ausar said, as he and the Toa of Electricity raced down the hill. "Those Betshu won't be in one piece after encountering this brute!"

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 9

 

As the Vatuka was being loaded onto the first Toa team's ship to be taken back to Tai-Koro, the second team of Toa was advancing through the caves beneath the Cliffs of Manu. Heru led this party, as he knew exactly what the Xcavator T7 would require in order to be piloted. He simply hoped that the vehicle would recall their previous encounter. Nebt-het had gone along as well; the diminutive Toa of Sonics seemed interested in piloting the Stryda T8 herself. Lyse had struck up a friendship with Heru, so naturally he demanded that he be a member of the group. And Matoba had gone because he wished to provide illumination within the twisted tunnels. Of course, the other Toa Terra knew that his real reason for going was that Heaka had been chosen as the sentry for the second team, and he wished to fight alongside her, if need be.

 

Now, Matoba walked at the front of the line of Toa, his fire staff held high aloft with a burning flame at the tip of it. Even with the comforting light, the subterranean catacombs loomed dauntingly ahead of the team. Stalactites hung from the rock ceiling at various intervals, covered with webs of long-dead Fikou, while stalagmites poked up from the hard-packed floor like giant spikes. Unlike the well-traversed mines beneath Terra Nui, no comforting Lightstones dotted the walls in regular patterns, no chunks of ore gleamed in the soft light, and no pieces of protodermis jutted from the ground or cave sides. Instead, mushroom-like fungi could be seen growing in clusters among broken boulders, and strange violet crystals branched out like the fingers of some giant mineral Betshu. Fortunately, the air was not muggy, but clean and fresh; Lyse would periodically blow it all out of the cave entrance and cycle in new air from the outside.

 

"It seems strange to me," Nebt-het said, using her keen eyesight to scan the tunnel, "that a former De-Matoran miner such as myself would never have seen this place before. I wonder if Aritonu ever ventured here, long ago. Of course, he's a Turaga now, and has been long gone, but I always did look up to him."

 

"This night-dark cavern gives me the fear-shivers," Lyse piped up from the back of the line. "Are you quite sure, Heru my friend, that this was where you sought-found the Xcavator in the first place?"

 

"Probably not," Heru said nonchalantly. "That was near where the Vatuka lives. If what Turaga Atemu tells me is correct, I commandeered the vehicle to burrow far away from where it originally was, ending up in the same place as the Stryda and the rest of the soon-to-be Toa."

 

Suddenly, at the front of the column, Matoba stopped. Motioning to Heaka, who was right behind him, he pointed his fire staff at the floor of the tunnel. "Look, there's a trail of rubble crossing our path. In fact, there appear to be two passageways on either side of us, as if something large dug its way through here." Upon closer observation, the Toa indeed saw two gaping holes in the tunnel wall, with chewed-up rock on the edges. Tread marks could be seen beneath the broken stone on the ground, and jagged gouges were present on the ceiling as well. Clearly, the Xcavator had gone through this passageway — or rather, created it — ages ago.

 

"Well, this just made finding our quarry a lot easier," Nebt-het said, looking through the holes. "Which direction do you think it was heading, Heru?"

 

The Toa of Gravity stuck his head through the gap on the Toa's left side, observing the wreckage littering the tunnel. "Judging from the swath of destruction of the stone here, I'd say it was traveling west, at around roughly thirty kio per hour."

 

Lyse's jaw dropped. "Wow, that's very impressive for a tracker-navigator! Now, however, I take it we'll need a true-brave Toa-hero to lead the way through this maze, and that will be me!" Using his Kanohi Dayku, the Toa of Air vanished from sight, with a large Hemisva beetle standing where he previously had been. With a quick hop, it scuttled over the broken stone and began clambering through the passageway. Matoba followed him, his torch held high, and the other three Toa soon disappeared from sight into the Xcavator's tunnel.

 

------

Though the five Toa were able to progress inside the tunnel to reach their destination, the terrain became increasingly more hazardous. Since the Xcavator had burrowed through the ground in this area millennia ago, much of the rock lining the ceiling and walls had since collapsed, forming broken boulders and jutting crags that littered their path. Some pieces of rock made barriers that were as wide as the tunnel, which had to be broken up to get past. Nebt-het usually did the honors, using power screams to blast the stone into oblivion. At one point, however, a wall of rubble created a space so narrow that Lyse was barely able to wiggle through, with no room for the other Toa to fit. Heaka had to solve the problem by using her Kanohi Marukti to liquefy herself, flowing through the gap and then destroying the barricade once she reached the other side.

 

After about a half hour of going through a seemingly-endless trail of debris, the team found what they were looking for. It was an expansive cave located deep within the cliffs, so vast that they could not see the other sides. Many columns of stone supported the ancient wall, and the decayed skeletons of long-dead Sebau and Samiu littered the floor, most of them missing multiple body parts. Fungi, lichen, and weird plants of uncountable varieties could be found everywhere, and large chunks of ore poked up from the ground. But the strangest sights in the room were a pair of vehicles right in front of the Toa — what had to be the Xcavator and the Stryda.

 

The former machine was probably the most bizarre contraption they had ever laid eyes on. It possessed a large central drilling apparatus on its front which stood almost as tall as a Toa, and was composed of many interlocking metal wheels with razor-sharp spikes. The cockpit was large and circular, capable of fitting a single Toa or Matoran for a pilot, and was sufficiently protected by two large hemisphere doors of transparent crystal. Its main body was heavily plated in protosteel and protodermis, and had two large treads on the bottom of the craft for movement on all types of terrain. Four boring arms were located at the back of the Xcavator; two of which were very long, had a great deal of articulation, and possessed fearsome drills on each of their tips. The two remaining arms were small and each had a rotary drill wheel. It did not appear to be very strong or move very fast, but this machine looked like it could plow through mountains.

 

The second vehicle was a bit more pleasant looking, if not for the fact that it was a little less ancient than the Xcavator. The Stryda gained its name from the fact that it possessed no treads, but rather could walk on six powerful legs with multiple pistons for support. It also could fit a Toa pilot in its cockpit, as well as a single passenger. Overall it seemed a rather unique and interesting mode of transportation, and fit in well with its fellow machine.

 

"They're incredible!" Nebt-het was awestruck at what they had found, and seemed particularly taken with the Stryda. "Can I have the walking one, Heru? Please?"

 

"May I ride-drive it as well?" Lyse asked. "It can, after all, fit two Toa-heroes."

 

"Sure, go right ahead," the Toa of Gravity said, moving toward the Xcavator. "I'll just power this old girl up like I did when I was a Matoran." Moving over to where his vehicle sat, Heru began to concentrate. According to Turaga Atemu, his Toa Benben was what had caused the vehicle to work the first time. Now, all he needed was to concentrate and use his Toa Power to . . .

 

With a hiss, the cockpit door opened, and Heru was able to enter. Hearing a gasp nearby him, he noticed that somehow the Stryda's cockpit had opened in response to Nebt-het's power as well. She and Lyse then went inside their vehicle. Grinning, he sat inside the cramped quarters, the door closing behind him.

 

Glancing at Heaka and Matoba outside, Heru checked to see that Nebt-het was inside her craft as well. Then, he looked at the glowing control panels, levers, and buttons before him.

 

"Hello, Heru. It's been a while, hasn't it?" The pleasant voice of the Xcavator's computer came from the speakers. He couldn't hear the computer voice from the Stryda, but he knew it had one: Nebt-het was excitedly shouting.

 

"Hey everyone! It talks! This is so cool!"

 

"It has indeed been a while, Xcavator; several millennia in fact," Heru said.

 

"Please input your destination."

 

"Very well. I wish for you to tunnel to the surface exactly above us, so that you and the Stryda can be taken back to Tai-Koro with us Toa. An evil force has imprisoned the Matoran of Kemet Nui, and we need your help to reach them so that they can be freed."

 

"Destination validated."

 

With that, the treads of the vehicle began to spin, and the Xcavator lurched forward. Its drills spinning furiously, it crawled over to the cavern wall and began to dig. The Stryda soon followed on its piston legs, with Nebt-het and Lyse cheering in excitement from within. Soon the two vehicles had disappeared from sight into a new tunnel that would lead them to the outside world.

 

Heaka motioned at Matoba to follow her. "We must be off. Time is of the essence if we are to liberate the Matoran."

 

"Indeed," Matoba said. The Toa of Fire and Water joined hands, and together, they started after the machines.

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 10

 

Argentaros strode through the primeval rainforest with sinuous grace, his mind occupied as usual with plans of finding the Mask of Nature. Around him, night had fallen speedily, with the eerie lights of fireflitters casting luminous beams around the trunks of massive Koa trees, flowery bushes, ferns, shrubs, and the occasional cycad. As usual on Terra Nui, it was raining heavily in this part of the forest — the very heart of the Johmai Jungle itself, in the center of Mount Juvala's lush western foothills. Now, Argentaros was on a mission, to find the Queen of the Visorak and persuade her to join the Quntaino's cause. Earlier that day, he had dispatched his six minions to scout out the edges of the Visorak territory, and to convince any reconnaissance brigades of the venomous spiders that the Quntaino were a benevolent group of beings who meant them no harm.

 

Though the Quntaino leader was fully convinced that he could persuade Gorgorak to come to terms with him, Argentaros was not entirely sure what he was going up against. The Terra Nui Visorak were a secluded subspecies of the warlike Rahi, which had established an isolated colony on Terra Nui soon after reaching the island. From what he had heard from Carcarinax, who had covertly researched Terra-Koro's history, the Matoran had not even established contact with the Visorak for a hundred millennia. Though the spiders of Terra Nui were not warlike and power-hungry like their Makuta-forsworn cousins, they were fiercely territorial: no travelers who had ever ventured into this part of the forest had ever returned alive. This had changed 3,400 years ago, however, when the Green One had explored his way into the heart of the jungle and made contact with Gorgorak and her colony. Though he had originally been captured and bound to become a Visorak snack, the little being had managed to charm his way out of danger and come to terms with the spider Rahi. After all, he spoke Visorak as well as the Quntaino did, Argentaros knew.

 

From then on, Matoran/Visorak relations had improved. The colony had agreed not to kill any Matoran pathfinders that accidentally entered their territory, and the Green One had even sworn to come to Gorgorak's aid in case some outside force threatened the Queen's life. That outside force came forty years ago, when the Dark Lord and the Sharaku invaded. Thanks to Hakeahu and the Mask of Nature, the Visorak realized the dire situation they were in, and helped the Toa Terra to crush the Drone Army at the Battle of Terra Nui. Since then, the arachnid Rahi had celebrated several Festivals of Diamonds with their fellow liberators, but had then retreated back into their forest stronghold when it was apparent that Terra Nui was once again at peace.

 

Argentaros also knew that the Matoran wanted the Visorak as allies as much as he did. The day before, Daigolva had killed a Gula to eat, and had found that the avian wyvern was marked with a scroll containing a message to Queen Gorgorak. Of course, it had requested her to send Visorak representatives to an emergency meeting in Terra-Koro regarding Terra Nui's security. And all because of the Quntaino. Fame has its benefits, it seems, he thought.

 

Pausing at a fallen tree that barred his path, Argentaros looked up. He knew that he was deep in colony territory now: the trees and vines around him were festooned with spiky green webbing. At various points along the lines, he could see glowing spider eyes regarding him with curiosity. Though these Visorak were partially hidden in shadows, Argentaros's superb nocturnal vision could easily discern them. Their color combinations were blended, it seemed, different from their forbears, the original six varieties. Probably from thousands of years of inbreeding, much like the Matoran. In addition to these sentries, multiple small Colony Drones (or Columni, as they called themselves in the language that they and the Visorak shared) could be seen scurrying around, carrying honey gourds and wads of fungus to feed their Rahi superiors. Of course, these timorous, antlike beings posed no threat whatsoever: Columni possessed only the tools they required as menial laborers, and the Rhotuka launchers on their backs, which were not used for combat.

 

Suddenly, a trio of Visorak rappelled downward in front of Argentaros. The apparent leader of the three, a mean-looking green and blue Kyborak, hissed vehemently at him. "State your business. Trespassers will not be tolerated in the Queen's realm."

 

Argentaros grinned toothily at the group. "Please," he said, addressing them in their own language, "I am known as Argentaros, and I come bearing alms and goodwill. I am one of your own. I seek to speak to your ruler, Gorgorak."

 

Though the Ookeerak and Roggarak at his side seemed lenient toward the Quntaino, the Kyborak was not entirely convinced. "And just why would the Queen have business with you?"

 

His smile quickly fading into a snarl, Argentaros roared ferociously and cracked his whiplash. Focusing his vermillion crystal eyes upon the green and blue Visorak, he applied every inch of his mental persuasion upon this unwilling mind as he screamed. "Because I possess powers over the forces of nature on this island which you have no clue as to the depths of, and which in the face of my enemies are terrifying to behold! Do not question my authority as a clan chief of the Visorak! Take me to your Queen, immediately!"

 

Visibly deflated, the cowering spider Rahi stammered pathetically up at him, as he and the other two Visorak cut themselves loose from their webs. "Y-y-yes, of-of- course, you-your honor . . ." Pointing a trembling foreleg ahead of him, the Kyborak motioned to Argentaros. "R-r-right this w-way."

 

Following behind his escorts, the alpha Quntaino soon found himself at the foot of an ancient Muata Vaca tree, its leafy canopy stretching almost a kio wide. Here the tree's tasty nuts hung in long clusters from hanging branches and dangling epiphytes, which almost touched the vast, gnarled roots. In the center of the tree trunk was carved an elaborate wooden throne, which was wide enough to fit all seven Quntaino comfortably, shoulder to shoulder. Resting in this large cranny, atop a massive mushroom cushion, sat Gorgorak. She was enormously fat, the size of an overfed Kagharak, her bloated blue and orange abdomen bulging with tangles of web and hundreds of unfertilized eggs. Her pudgy legs waved incessantly in the air, as dozens of servant Visorak and Columni hastened to tend to her and do her bidding. Yet despite her bulk, her bulbous eyes glimmered dangerously, and her double pair of menacing mandibles gleamed razor sharp. Here truly was a matriarch not to be trifled with.

 

The Kyborak saluted, along with his soldiers, and then pointed at Argentaros. "Your Majesty, the clan chief Argentaros desires to speak with you on important matters." With that done, he and the other two Visorak scuttled back off into the shadows.

 

Leaning forward, Gorgorak peered at the newcomer, stuffing a wad of fungus and a honey gourd into her mouth simultaneously with her two forelegs. After some noisy chewing, she spoke. "I see that you are no native Rahi to our lands, stranger. You are also no clan chieftain, despite what Captain Kryzok and his lieutenants seem to think. What brings you to the court of the Visorak?"

 

Genuflecting as low as he could, Argentaros responded with the same attitude he had used earlier. "My lady, what I request is merely an . . . alliance, so to speak." At this point, he began using his mental influence again. "You see, as the leader of a seven-strong group of beings that are acting for the island's best interest, we need an army to help us deal with . . . a persistent problem, shall we say?"

 

Gorgorak's eyes narrowed. The Queen was no fool — she needed to hear the entirety of what the alpha Quntaino had to say before agreeing to any terms. "Which is?"

 

"The Matoran, madam," Argentaros replied, spitting the word as though it were an obscenity. "These pitiful little beings are being wanton and destructive. The Mask of Nature must be kept out of their paws if we are to survive on Terra Nui."

 

"Impossible!" Gorgorak seemed dumbfounded, as did most of the Visorak. "The Matoran have never meant us any harm. It was they who defeated the Dark-Lord-being and his tall Skakdi-servants. We saw so ourselves, and we aided them! And furthermore, we agreed with the small axe one not to eat any more Matoran who entered our territory — this treaty has been in effect for thousands of years! Do you honestly mean to tell us that we are in danger from our former allies?"

 

Giving an elaborate sight, Argentaros' face fell dramatically. "Alas, I am afraid that these Matoran have been this way all along. It is in their nature. And, to make things worse, the six Torika who were formerly your friends have been transformed into Sharaku. Now they are just as evil and corrupt as the beings who invaded Terra Nui. I am afraid that you have no course of action but to join me. Serve as an army for myself and for my six fellows, and you will help us to obtain the Zlinj and restore harmony to our island. Do we have a deal?"

 

The Visorak Queen thought this over for quite some time: she found no fault with what the Quntaino was saying, but still was not entirely convinced that the Matoran were against the Visorak's well-being. She deliberated while her entourage loudly debated the matter. Argentaros knew full well the degree of his accusations: while he was sure that what the Matoran were doing was wrong, he did not know for a fact that they, the new Sharaku, or even the Green One were completely evil. But that did not mater. As long as he used his control over nature to keep the Visorak hive mother under his thumb, Argentaros knew that he would not be questioned.

 

After some time, Gorgorak turned to face him. "Very well, Argentaros. We shall comply with you, and provide you with food, supplies from our Columni workers, and, of course, a vast amount of soldiers. If what you are saying is correct, then we must defend our homes against an invasion by the Matoran and the Sharaku, should they come. And we must not let the Mask of Nature come into their hands." Though still in control of her Visorak, the Queen was obviously under the alpha Quntaino's influence. "Your wish is my command."

 

Sneering wide from his success, Argentaros bowed again. "I assure you, mistress Gorgorak, you will find our partnership most satisfying, I am sure." He then snapped his whiplash with a loud crack. Soon afterward, Daigolva, Carcarinax, Icrizahk, Nosfernox, Predacron, and Snimurai materialized from behind a row of bushes behind him. The six subordinate Quntaino had been behind their leader for the entire conversation, patiently waiting for his orders.

 

"Now, then, Your Majesty," Argentaros said, as the six joined him in front of the Visorak, "I would like you to meet some dear friends of mine . . ."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 11

 

With the Vatuka, the Xcavator, and the Stryda in hand, the two parties of Toa were able to return safely to the Dahkla Oasis. The giant Rahi, utterly tame due to Chompshi and Ausar's befriending it, seemed to enjoy being active and ready to bash Betshu skulls. Likewise, the two vehicles seemed perfectly suited for the task they were about to perform. Now that they possessed the tools they needed, the two Turaga set to work.

 

The Toa Terra and the Toa Septiu now found themselves beneath the Ta-She Lowlands, in a series of tunnels that the Xcavator was creating. According to Akito and Atemu's plan, the Xcavator and Stryda would dig out tunnels extending from the Oasis to the vast subterranean concentration camp where Apep had imprisoned the Matoran. In addition to the fourteen heroes, the overeager Vatuka had been brought as a failsafe in case the team was confronted by a large force of hostile guards. The plan was to find the area where the Betshu guards were largely concentrated, and set loose the Vatuka to distract them and knock them unconscious. Meanwhile, the Toa would use their weapons and elemental powers to free the Matoran from their cells, and lead them back to where the vehicles were parked. Then, if any Sebau and Samiu began pursuit, the Xcavator and Stryda would lead the group back to the surface, with the Toa and Vatuka serving as a rear guard. Hopefully, all of the Betshu would be eliminated, so that Apep and Aso would not be alerted of any break-in.

 

As usual, Heru was in the lead, with Nebt-het and Lyse following close behind. Though the Xcavator had already dug through several kio of earth to reach its current destination, the Toa of Gravity was not entirely sure of where the party was in relation to the surface. After all, neither Atemu nor Akito knew exactly where the Matoran of Tai-Koro were being imprisoned.

 

At the head of the Toa line behind the vehicles, with the Vatuka bringing up the rear, Chompshi was using his thunder lance to provide electric illumination. Though the designated leader of the party, this did not stop him from being harangued by the ill-tempered Toa of Storms. "This is ridiculous," Sutehk said. "We've been traveling for close to a half hour now, and we still don't know where we are or if we're even close to the Matoran! We could be down here for hours, traverse the whole of the island, and still never find them!"

 

"Stop complaining," Vrael replied. "We aren't lost as long as Heru keeps moving forward. He should know where we are. Nevertheless, if you insist, we can get our bearings. Chompshi, if you please."

 

Nodding at his friend, Chompshi pulled out a communication device that Turaga Atemu had furnished him with. After some tinkering, Akito had connected it to the same frequency as the Xcavator and Stryda's computer modules. Now the Toa of Electricity could communicate with each vehicle at any time. "Hey, Heru! How are things up at your end?"

 

"Well, I've stopped digging for now. There's a large boulder blocking our path, and it will take a few minutes to drill through it all. But I have absolutely no idea of where we are. Neither do Nebt-Het or Lyse. Honestly, unless we can use some kind of sonar to scan through the soil, we will be utterly lost!"

 

Stifling Sutehk’s sarcastic laugh in response to Heru, Chompshi turned around to address the six Toa Terra behind him. "Alright, everyone, we need to figure out how far away the prison is. Pacha, can you help us?"

 

The Toa of Stone stepped forward, a huge grin spread across her face. "Well, Chompshi, I'll see what I can do here." While the Toa leader ordered Heru to stop the Xcavator’s drill, Pacha moved to the front of the procession, next to the gigantic burrowing implement.

 

Concentrating with her Kanohi Ijuta, she felt the earth around her in a large radius. Any major tunnel, cave, or mining station would be detected by her Kanohi as a disturbance in the soil in that particular area. After several minutes of scanning, she found what she was looking for: a huge cavern located due east from the Xcavator, three kio away.

 

"I found it!" she yelled, running back to where Chompshi stood expectantly. "It's three kio from us, directly to our right!"

 

As the Toa cheered for their comrade’s timely assistance, Chompshi spoke to Heru. "Alright, start her up and head her east. The prison isn't far at all."

 

------

Twenty minutes and three kio later, the Xcavator was startled by an unusual crunching sound. Looking forward, Heru peered at the place where the drill was stalling. He noticed that a silvery material was peeling in minute flakes away from the front of his vehicle. It could only be one thing: protosteel.

 

"I just hit a wall! The prison must be located right in front of us!" Heru yelled into his communicator.

 

"Excellent," Chompshi replied. "Now, we must make haste. Heru, Nebt-het, back up a ways so that there's space in front of you for the Toa back here."

 

Soon the eleven heroes found themselves looking at a jagged hole in the wall, lined with shredded protosteel and broken protodermis. Peering inside the gap, Nuukor could see a few further inches of metal. "Let me handle this." He pulled out his rotary electropole and turned it on, using the weapon to drill a small, neat hole into the wall. Nebt-het then made sure to create a sound barrier around the Toa so that no Betshu could hear them from the other side.

 

Once the job was finished, Nuukor turned to Heaka. "I can't see inside myself, and if I did go inside, I might alert any guards. You, on the other hand, can remain undetected as a puddle of water. Go in there, see what you can, and tell us how the situation looks."

 

"Got it." Heaka used her Kanohi to transform into a liquid state, and, with a quick swish, flowed through the tiny gap to the other side. Condensing herself, she then observed her surroundings.

 

She found herself in a broad cavern about twenty bio high and hundreds wide. Around the perimeter was a metal wall with heavy bolts in it, to keep out any intruders. Guard platforms were built into the stone outcroppings that projected near the ceiling, which were being patrolled heavily. Near the back was a protodermis door that several sentries were moving in and out of, suggesting a barracks of sorts where the guards lived. But what Heaka saw next was so heart-wrenching that she had to control herself not to gasp in horror. Hundreds of Matoran, with some of every tribe, were jammed tight into protosteel cages arranged in multiple rows. Though all of the Matoran were silent, they did not appear passive at all: several wore chains or manacles, and many more appeared to have been whipped or beaten, suggesting many instances of resistance.

 

Worst of all were the Betshu themselves. Heaka got to see them in gory detail, as a Sebau and Samiu went to investigate her before deciding that this puddle was merely a leak in their walls. The Sebau was short and squat, with lime green skin and small, muscular limbs. It had a silver chest plate and tiny silver wings on its back, and carried a thick chain in its claws. The Samiu was taller, and red in hue, with a leaner, more slender body and limbs. It too bore silver armor, but had a pair of gauntlets on its hands, each one sprouting long blades. What really chilled her to the bone, however, were the Betshu’s vacant, skull-like faces, each grinning grimly below a set of red, watery eyes. Atop their heads were sturdy, domed helmets, fitting covers for dim-witted troglodytes such as themselves.

 

Once she had seen all she needed to see, Heaka went back through the hole and returned to her solid form. "The place is just crawling with soldiers — at least a hundred of them! And those poor Matoran, they are trapped like Hoto bugs in a cage! We must do something now, in order to set them free!"

 

"We must escape detection, though," Matoba added. "The problem lies in getting the Vatuka to an area where it can overwhelm the guards, while we rush in there and free the Matoran before making our getaway." He turned to Pacha and Nuukor. "Do you two think you can dig a smaller tunnel for the Vatuka to get through, so that he can have his chance to join the brawl?"

 

"Gladly," Nuukor said. "But we'll need to know where to strike. Heaka, where did you say the barracks were?"

 

"Directly across from us, I think. Of course, you two tunnel much slower than the Xcavator, so we will need some time."

 

Pacha patted her friend on the shoulder. "Don't worry about us, Heaka. With old Vatuka on our side, what can go wrong?"

 

------

Inside their lair, the Sebau and Samiu were having a typical day. Though none too bright, the troglodytes followed Apep's directions precisely: whip fast, whip hard, keep the female and adolescent Matoran quiet, and beat any troublemakers. Today, some of their guards had had to deal with a particularly offensive and odiferous Matoran named Lacri. This black and red bully had been reprimanded several times for insulting his captors and for trying to attack them and his fellow inmates: now he was in manacles, stocks, and three sets of chains. Apart from their finding a strange leak in their western wall, everything was proceeding as usual.

 

One of the Sebau had stopped to get a tankard of Bula wine from one of the cached barrels when the entire barracks room shook as if from thunder. Startled, the dim-witted Betshu checked to see if the tap was working properly.

 

He was then buried under a massive pile of rubble, consisting of stone and protodermis that had previously been the nearest wall. As the other Sebau and Samiu looked up in befuddlement, fear struck their black, twisted hearts. They saw a colossal black and silver Rahi, with plated armor, jagged spikes, and huge horns, baring a mouth full of dagger-like teeth while glaring at them with a pair of baleful orange eyes. It gave a brutish roar, prepared to tear anything in its path to pieces.

 

Sitting atop the bloodthirsty Vatuka, right behind its head on its armored neck, Ausar casually sharpened his Kepesh. With a smile, he pointed the weapon at the Betshu. "Greetings, you filthy Kraata-spawn. Say hello to my little friend!"

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 12

 

As the Vatuka charged the terrified Betshu, Heaka slid through the tiny hole in the wall as a flow of water. Returning quickly to her Toa form, she observed that all of the guards in the vast chamber were hurrying over to the barracks. Satisfied that their plan was working, she ran a few bio forward, turned around, and yelled at her friends on the other side of the wall. "Okay, they're all leaving to get to where Ausar is! Let's get down to business!"

 

"Right!" Vrael responded. As Heaka watched, the wall suddenly became crystallized as Vrael struck it with his staff. The crystal then began to emit chain lightning and vibrate rapidly, before a bang and flash of smoke engulfed it. When the smoke cleared, Chompshi and Vrael stood in the center of a hole big enough to admit all the Toa, with their weapon tips still glowing.

 

"What was that?" Matoba was surprised by what his two elders had just done. "I've never seen you two combine your powers like that before."

 

"It's a new technique he and I have started practicing," Chompshi chuckled. His tone turned authoritative, however, as he began rattling off commands. "Alright, everyone, we have about twenty minutes before those Betshu regroup! Nuukor, Pacha, I want you to seal the barracks door for now, while we free all the Matoran. Then, I'll send a telepathic nudge to Ausar, and he and the Vatuka will break through to join us. After that, we must get to the vehicles as fast as possible with all the freed Matoran in tow, so that we can high-tail it out of here and get back to the surface before the Betshu call for reinforcements. Go!"

 

Rapidly, the Toa team dispersed into groups of two, while Heru monitored the entrance to get easy access to the Xcavator. As Pacha and Nuukor sealed the protodermis door behind a stone and earth barrier, the remaining ten Toa split up among the ten long rows of prisoners. The Matoran, formerly quiet lest they be whipped, now seemed filled with newfound energy that a group of Toa had magically arrived to rescue them. Anpu kept an eye out for heavily bound or injured prisoners, who he would need to heal.

 

Looking at the first captive, Auset froze, a look of disbelief on her Kanohi Qemhu. She motioned for Sutekh, Anpu, and Nebt-het to gather near her. "Mata Nui alive! Come and look at this!"

 

The cell held not a Matoran but an old Turaga, wearing a battered, dark red Noble Rau, clad in tattered gold and ebony robes, and handcuffed to his own staff. As Auset cut open the cell with her javelin and freed him from his chains, the Turaga looked quizzically at his rescuers.

 

"Auset? Is that you? My word, you were a young one the last time I saw you! Not only have you sprouted, but you have become a Toa! Well, I'll be a Brakas' uncle!" Turning toward the other Toa, he gave a formal bow, a smile across his weathered face. "Thank you for busting me out of this Kinloka-trap. I am known as Pelekua, Turaga Sah of Rahi Control."

 

"Pelekua? The Pelekua? Well, I'll be!" Anpu seemed just as suprised as Auset. "I remember Atemu telling stories about your heroic deeds, like riding a full-grown Kikanolo bareback with nothing but a flax rope, but I never dreamed about seeing you in the flesh! Atemu and Akito will be quite surprised to see that you are alive!"

 

"Don't bother about healing me, I'm fine," Pelekua said boisterously. "So Atemu and Akito still live, eh? I figured that they would still be alive, the rascals. Well, I've been imprisoned down here by Apep so long that I've virtually forgotten what millennium I'm in!"

 

"As fascinating as this conversation is, we should really be working on freeing the other Matoran," Nebt-het chimed in.

 

"I'm already on it," Sutekh said, as he untangled a struggling Tryna-wearing Kur-Matoran from his chains, stocks, and manacles. "We'd better give this one a bath: he never can seem to smell good, can he?"

 

"Don't bug me about my body odor, I can't help it!" Lacri whined. "I've been through a living Karzahni for the last few decades, chained and beaten up by these horrible Betshu! Trust me, they stink far worse than I do!"

 

Auset looked disdainfully at the Kur-Matoran bully as Anpu healed Lacri's wounds. "You should be ashamed of yourself. We just rescued you after several centuries or more of you being imprisoned in here, in a horrible condition, and you can't even thank us? After all those years of you treating Ausar like dirt, you ought to feel grateful to him."

 

While Lacri babbled a hasty apology, she turned to the other three Toa Septiu. "Come on. We have more hostages to liberate."

 

------

 

After another ten minutes, the two groups of Toa had freed all of the Matoran captives. The majority of them seemed healthy and vital; the Betshu had apparently been under orders from Apep not to starve their prisoners. Among the Tai-Koro citizens, the Ko-Matoran Hutchai, the Le-Matoran Skhri, and the Onu-Matoran Khaur seemed the most vital and ready to lead the Matoran to safety. With about 250 of their freed friends in tow, the four Toa Septiu met with the Toa Terra in the center of the prison camp.

 

"Okay," Chompshi said, once everyone was assembled, "My team has the other half of the Matoran with us. Fortunately, we found a pair of Av-Matoran guards who will be able to tell us where the Sisterhood of Het-hert members are; besides Nekhebet, of course." He pointed at Meti and Shna, still carrying their staves and wearing their ceremonial garb, who saluted in response. "But we found quite a few Matoran in our half that seemed to be either very badly injured, or partially insane and confused. Anpu, you'll need to fix them for us."

 

Three Matoran stepped forward. Two of them were Onu-Matoran miners like Khaur, who were named Urek and Pega. But both, it seemed, had been down in the catacombs so long that their sanity was somewhat lacking, and they now incessantly bickered like a breeding pair of Nui-Bauk. As for the Ga-Matoran Horgah, her condition was so terrible that it brought the mild-mannered Toa of Magnetism to tears. Her Miru was badly disfigured, one of her eyes was gone, and part of her foot was missing. The poor thing, unlike Pega and Urek, was not speaking at all, only crying softly from her remaining eye.

 

"Here," Anpu said, "Let me tend to them. First, I'll put these two back into their right minds." He walked over to Pega and Urek, standing between the arguing Onu-Matoran. Putting a hand on each of their heads, he channeled the power of his Kanohi Senb, searching for any damaged body parts. After a few seconds, he found what he was looking for: neurons in each Matoran's brain were misfiring, causing their slight insanity. With a gentle caress from his fingers, healing energy flowed into the brain cells, mending their ruptured synapses. As their wits returned to them and Anpu withdrew his hands, Pega and Urek's manic snarls were replaced with looks of surprise. They looked at each other, shrugged, and embraced in a mighty hug.

 

"Now that that's over with, let me help you with Horgah," said Auset. Kneeling down to head level of the crying Ga-Matoran, she held put a hand on Horgah's shoulder. "Don't worry, everything is going to be all right. I'll just reassure you telepathically while Anpu fixes you up." Nodding at her, Anpu focused his quick healing powers on Horgah. Slowly, as she stood there enveloped in a glowing veil of light, her lost eye reappeared, and her foot nearly mended itself. Anpu's powers were being stretched to the limit by this, and after the process was over, he fell to his knees, panting heavily. As for Horgah, her grief turned to immense joy as she found herself practically whole once again.

 

"I'm back to normal! Oh, thank you, Anpu and Auset!" she cried jubilantly. The happiness on her face turned to a look of resolve, as she turned to Vrael and Chompshi. "Now, let us flee this horrible place."

 

"Alright," Vrael said. "Chompshi, alert Ausar that our time is up. Let's get out of here".

 

------

 

Once the mental prod had been sent, the Toa immediately heard a massive rumbling. Turning, they saw the colossal form of the Vatuka burst through the stone and earthen-reinforced barracks door, roaring madly. Though the great Rahi had killed and maimed dozens of Betshu, the evil troglodytes had called for reinforcements, which not even Ausar and the Vatuka would be able to overcome. As they thundered toward the party, Ausar brandished his Kepesh high, pointing at the hundreds of Sebau and Samiu that were rapidly scuttling after him.

 

"Run! Get to the vehicles now! Apep has sent more of his minions after us! Run!"

 

With terror-induced speed, Heru quickly boarded the Xcavator as Nebt-het and Lyse climbed into the Stryda. Chompshi and Vrael motioned for the other Toa, Turaga Pelekua, and all of the Matoran to follow behind the retreating vehicles, while the Vatuka served as a rear guard. "Come on! Into the tunnels! Pacha, Nuukor, you stay behind us to collapse the tunnels to seal them off! Go!"

 

The Matoran, for being cramped up in their cells for weeks on end, were remarkably fast runners. As they all crowded into the tunnel, the Vatuka galloped through the hole in the wall made by Chompshi and Vrael. Once the Vatuka and Ausar had gone through, the two Toa Terra at the rear of the party looked at each other, nodded once, and then turned to face the oncoming horde.

 

The slavering, sneering Betshu had made it into their prison cave and were rapidly advancing. Just as they neared the hole in the wall, however, Pacha and Nuukor unleashed their powers. A veritable avalanche of rock fell from the ceiling to form a huge pile in front of the two Toa, burying many of the Betshu under it and spilling into the cave itself. Once the dust cleared, the war-mad troglodytes found themselves up against an unbreakable, five-bio tall mountain of broken boulders, crushed stone, and chunks of protodermis, which utterly walled off any chance of pursuit through the tunnels. Their captives had escaped.

 

Outside, the retreating Toa teams and the freed Matoran were already far away. Amid the cheers of the Matoran, Ausar leaned down from the galloping Vatuka to speak to Auset, who was running beside the steed.

 

"We did free the people of Tai-Koro, true. But something very bad has still occurred."

 

"What is that?" Auset asked, not understanding entirely what the matter was.

 

"Those Betshu didn't just lose their prisoners by accident. They have eyes and can report to their superiors. We are now in mortal danger. Apep and Aso will find out that we Toa have returned."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 13

 

Back at the Oasis, the Toa teams had returned as jubilant heroes. With the five-hundred freed Matoran in tow, they made it back to their camp with no Betshu in pursuit. For Akito and Atemu, the reunion with Pelekua was a joyous one, as they hadn't seen their comrade in at least fifty-thousand years. Consequently, Pelekua hadn't heard of much that was going on at the current time on Kemet Nui. Nevertheless, the gutsy old Turaga Sah was more than happy to aid in the effort to liberate Tai-Koro.

 

As for Nekhebet, the previously lonely Chronicler now found herself surrounded by her fellow villagers, including the loyal Guards Meti and Shna. Upon reaching the encampment, the stalwart pair had positioned themselves on either side of the entrance to the Turaga's tent where she too resided, their pikes and Philae short swords in hand in case they needed to defend her. Thanks to Meti, Shna, and Nekhebet's knowledge of fighting, obtained from the Captain of the Guard Sekhet, the Av-Matoran were now tasked with training the others in combat. Fortunately, since the villagers of Kemet Nui had spent their whole lives in fear of a Betshu attack, they needed only minimal touching up to sharpen their battle skills.

 

Once their army was prepared, the Toa had gone to the three Turaga to receive instructions for the final phase of the plan: driving Apep's legions out of Tai-Koro.

 

"Alright everyone, now pay attention!" Atemu called out. He, Akito, and Pelekua stood on a large wooden podium in the center of the camp, while the Toa Terra and Toa Septiu sat on the tree trunks in front of them, and the Matoran stood behind the Toa to observe the proceedings. As usual, Nekhebet, Meti, and Shna stood off to one side, patiently listening to everything their elder was saying. "We have only one chance to take Tai-Koro before Apep and Aso send their troglodytes here to finish us off. The Dahkla Oasis cannot remain hidden forever, so we must act now if we are to succeed."

 

As the Toa and Matoran watched, Akito pulled out a large map of the village and spread it out on a moss-covered stump in front of the podium. Atemu pointed his Superthermal Sickle at it as he continued. "You can see here that Tai-Koro's main entrance, though heavily barricaded, still offers a way into the village. All of the other possible entrances to Tai-Koro would have been from the Re-Stau, but we destroyed those long ago to keep the Betshu out. We have to go this way, then, and you Toa can head to the Re-Stau later to bring back any remaining refugees hiding there."

 

"But won't the Betshu see us coming, and prepare accordingly to keep us out?" Horgah asked. "Besides, if we try to climb the walls, we will be defeated by Auset's thorny vine cover and those archaic, automated energy weapons! What about that?"

 

Akito gave her a crafty smile. "There is another option, which my Kanohi Zalmex has devised to work precisely." He aimed the tip of his fire staff in front of the Great Philae Temple. "As you all know, the six remaining Sisterhood of Het-hert members are under siege in the Temple. However, because that place is a veritable fortress, defended by those very same weapons you mentioned, the Betshu will have not gotten inside. And I have calculated that when our army approaches, they will concentrate along the outer walls and in the streets. Meanwhile, Heru, Nebt-het, and Lyse will take the Xcavator and the Stryda, dig a tunnel leading to the Maa-ti Ur under the center of the Temple, and lead half of our army into Tai-Koro from beneath."

 

Atemu nodded. "Then, of course, you can open the Temple's doors, free the Sisters, and launch a surprise attack upon the Betshu from behind, while the other half of the army attacks them from outside the village. Together, we can defeat them and reclaim Tai-Koro."

 

Horgah seemed satisfied with the Turaga's plan. "While Overseer of the Temple, I helped design some of its fortifications. I know the Great Philae like the back of my hand, so I can certainly help us free Bast and the others."

 

"Naturally," Pelekua added, "the weaker Matoran, as well as us three Turaga, need to stay here during the battle. While we would otherwise relish joining in the liberation of our village, we must stay at the Oasis, so that we can remain hidden from the Betshu. As long as their stronghold is being attacked, they would not dare risk attacking our sanctuary."

 

"What about the Vatuka?" Ausar asked, scratching the monstrous Rahi underneath its chin. "Must it remain here as well?"

 

Akito chuckled at this remark, seeing that the Toa Septiu leader had obviously become attached to the great beast. "No, of course not. You will need more than just your Toa powers to break through the front gate of Tai-Koro. Besides, its mere presence will probably instill fear into those Betshu’s hearts."

 

"You also spoke of these Nak as defending the village," Chompshi said. "Should we have to worry about them?"

 

"Not really," Pelekua answered. "I remember fighting those hideous freaks when I was a strapping young Toa Sah. They aren't much to look at individually, not compared to a Team of Toa."

 

Scanning the three Turaga's audience, Atemu cleared his throat. "I trust that this plan is clear with everyone?" Finding no objection, his weathered face broke into a grin. "Good. It pleases me to no end to see you all here, my friends. Only a few years ago, in the company of only Turaga Aritonu, the Sisters, and the Toa Septiu, I would have said that our chances of defeating the Betshu hordes were slim to nonexistent. But now, with two of my dearest teammates, fourteen Toa, five-hundred-and-one Matoran, and a legendary Rahi at my side, I know now that we possess a splendid opportunity."

 

Akito, who had been quietly listening a moment ago, raised his gaze to the heavens. For once, the blazing sun of Kemet Nui had relented in its eternal glare. It seemed as though a pleasant and mild calm surrounded them at the Dahkla Oasis — like the calm before a storm.

 

Then he held up his fire staff like a beacon for all to follow, speaking with a voice full of determination and resolve. "Let's go."

 

------

Deep beneath the heart of Kemet Nui, far below even the tunnels of the Xcavator, there existed a mighty bastion. No Rahi dared go near it, nor had any Matoran ever seen it, only having heard of it in their darkest, most primeval legends. This was a place of intense horror, a collection of catacombs infused with a presence so evil, that the Great Beings themselves would tremble with fear, if only they had walked its halls.

 

Inside its spacious central chamber, huge torches burned away with relentless intensity. On its walls, torture implements and the remains of conquered foes slowly gathered dust and decay. Sebau and Samiu patrolled this area by the hundreds, though they knew full well that their master and mistress would never be threatened in their own abode.

 

On one wall of this structure stood a pair of thrones, each one putrid and shadowy in a manner that would make a Makuta's skin crawl. One was taller than the other, covered in pointed spires and dangerous spikes, incorporating the broken Kanohi of long-dead Matoran and the twisted tools of long-vanquished Toa. The other was just as vile, in a sleeker, more feminine way, draped in tattered tapestries and silken garlands. But of the two, only the former was occupied.

 

The being who lounged in the throne's comfortable embrace was one straight out of a nightmare. He wore a long and ornate cape, and possessed the form of a small and relatively weak-looking elder; but this guise was misleading, as he could change his appearance to become gigantic and powerful. His body was covered in blood-red and black armor, and his razor-like claws held no weapons, instead gripping the arms of the throne expectantly. Perhaps the most utterly frightening aspect of him was his face. He wore a Great Kanohi Jutlin, the Mask of Corruption, its jutting blades and wicked teeth bared in a feral, insane grimace, while his glittering, bloodshot, crimson eyes seemed to stare into one's soul, as if they could inflict madness as dire as his own upon the hapless victim.

 

This was Apep, the Scourge of Kemet Nui, King of the Betshu, Atukam incarnate. And he desired nothing more than complete and utter dominion over the entire Dome of Kemet Nui, and merciless control over all of its inhabitants.

 

Upon hearing the sound of footsteps, this demonic figure turned to see another being enter the room. She was identical in stature to him, with a similar cape and armor, only carrying a staff of rank and sporting a black and lime Avsa. While the Scourge of Punt Nui, his mate, had arrived on Kemet Nui several days prior, she had been remarkably restless.

 

"Well, Aso?" Apep demanded. "Those pathetic fools up above have frustrated me to no end! First they free all of my prisoners and kill my best guards, and now they are probably plotting some new strike against Tai-Koro!"

 

His mate looked at him gleefully, her green eyes sparkling with wicked malice. "Do not fret, dearest. I have just dispatched the last Nak to our prize on the surface of Kemet Nui. If Akito, Atemu, and Pelekua think they can take back Tai-Koro with sheer force alone, then they have another thing coming."

 

Apep's frown turned into a jubilant sneer. "That should do it, then. One-thousand Betshu versus a paltry twenty-five score of Matoran and a couple of upstart Toa. I'd say the odds are in our favor, wouldn't you?"

 

"Indeed," Aso replied. "Who needs those useless Vorukan Royal Guards or that treacherous Ballom? We have enough soldiers to last a millennium! Let the Matoran come to us. They won't survive until day's end!"

 

Stepping down from his throne, Apep embraced the Queen of the Betshu. "Yes, my love," the Scourge said, "it's all falling into place."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 14

 

Less than a day after Argentaros had made his way into the realm of Queen Gorgorak, the six Sharaku and the Green One were rapidly trailblazing through the Johmai Jungle in that direction. Though the noon sun shone brightly overhead, the thick canopy and tangled understory made relatively little light filter through the treetops. As a result, Hanak led the party along with their diminutive trail guide, both of his incandescent fire swords lit to provide his six friends with some illumination. What seemed odd to the Sharaku, however, was the unnatural silence that pervaded the deepest, darkest heart of the rainforest. Ordinarily, Rahi of all kinds would be creating quite a racket as they gathered or hunted for their midday meal. But at this moment, everything was quiet.

 

The Green One, having knelt down to sniff and taste the dirt in order to discern any traces of fresh tracks, stood up and raised his axe, in order to move aside a large cycad frond that was obstructing his path. However, as his axe head brushed aside the gymnosperm, a previously-hidden, dark green and red mass snapped forward, its head revealing a gristly skull with multiple hollow eye sockets and a bristling mass of jagged teeth.

 

"Eyaah!" Startled half to death by this sudden apparition, the Green One and the Sharaku fell back, weapons at the ready in case the Quntaino had started to attack. Around them, various Rahi, disturbed by the commotion, made multiple shrieks, roars, and squawks. Then all was silence once more.

 

"Mata Nui, that was scary!" Zanta said, moving forward to poke the thing with his own axes. "But wait a minute, this isn't even alive!" What had first appeared to be a ferocious being was in fact an adolescent Ariakudo, long dead and desiccated, its vermillion exoskeleton left as a final remnant of the once fierce arachnid. Judging by the thick cocoon of silk that enveloped it, the spider Rahi had apparently been trapped by the Visorak and had the very juices sucked from the innards, until it was bone dry.

 

Shouldering his weapon sheepishly, the Green One winced at the carcass. "Yeah, I tink dat was false alarm, but still, vewy scary if you not see immediately. Dis big Visorak tewitowy we be in right now. Be on yous guards."

 

The Sharaku nodded, moving past the dead Ariakudo and deeper into Gorgorak's lair. As they moved into a large clearing, they could see multiple webs in the trees above them, but no Visorak were in sight. Instead, Thukor's keen eyesight spotted several Columni performing their usual tasks of menial labor; but when the Green One attempted to communicate with them, they fled timorously into the refuge of their nest.

 

"That's odd," Kavan observed. "Judging from Turaga Akito's histories, those little guys have never run off from you before."

 

"Hang on," Hanak said, as a trio of Visorak rappelled down in front of the group. "We've got company. Green One, you do the talking."

 

Bowing low and giving his best disarming look, the little being addressed the Kyborak, Ookeerak, and Roggarak in front of him. "Gweetings, fellows. As your faithful fwiend, da Sharaku and me would like to see Queen Gorgorak, to discuss big important matters."

 

Lieutenant Kryzok brushed him aside, glaring straight at Hanak and his team. "I know who you are! You are not to be trusted! Guards, seize them!"

 

As a dozen more Visorak descended from the foliage to surround the Sharaku and the Green One, Hanak yelled in protest. "Whoa, hang on here! We never meant you any harm. Please, we must see Gorgorak, as the matter is one of life and death!"

 

"Bah! You Sharaku are all the same, Dark Lord or no Dark Lord!" Kryzok spat contemptuously. "We'll show you to the Queen all right — unconscious, wrapped up in silk, and pumped full of Hordika venom!" And with that, the Visorak charged.

 

Fortunately for the Sharaku and the Green One, they had drawn their weapons as soon as the additional spiders had arrived. Thus, they immediately began to defend themselves. Hanak, targeted as the leader from the beginning, had been pounced on by Kryzok and his two subordinate officers, who were attempting to wrap him up. Because he was pinned down, the Sharaku of Fire was unable to use his fire swords to slash at the Visorak directly; however, he was able to heat the blades up to unbearably high temperatures. As they recoiled from the blistering temperatures, Hanak thrust out his arms, spinning in a whirlwind of flame that sent the three Visorak spinning off to crash into the bushes.

 

Elsewhere, Zanta was using his rapid teleportation to dodge a barrage of balls of webbing, which were being fired at him by multiple Visorak hanging around him. Rieka had tunneled below ground as soon as she could, and was now in the process of burying some unlucky Suhnorak up to their mandibles in earth. Vukaz, combining both his elemental power and natural power in an ingenious technique, had captured several spider soldiers inside multiple force fields, which he formed into bubbles and filled with water. Suddenly deprived of air, the Rahi could only flounder about until they passed out from lack of oxygen. He then freed these to trap more, while Kavan speedily summoned portals to fling both conscious and unconscious Visorak from the clearing into the nests from whence they came.

 

The Green One was not so lucky, as he had been immediately surrounded by multiple Visorak, who knew that this little being was tricky and hard to disarm. Batting off biting jaws with only an axe and a shield was proving to be a daunting task. But the Green One, in his slippery way, soon found a way to beat these marauders. He holed himself up inside a massive, moss-covered log, which the Visorak, for all the strength of their mouthparts, could not saw through. Every time one tried to get into the narrow opening, he was met by a sharp slice from the Green One's axe, sending him scuttling away in pain.

 

Out of all these scuffles, though, perhaps none were more impressive than Thukor's. The Sharaku of Ice had never really had a chance to use his powers of healing to full advantage, but they would now be utilized gloriously. After being jumped by a trio of Visorak, he had managed to defend himself with freezing parries from his ice blades. But the airborne web-shooting spiders, judging by his outward appearance that this Sharaku was the weakest, enveloped him in multiple threads of webbing, covering Thukor completely and leaving him supine on the forest floor for their poison to do its nefarious work. At least, they thought it would succeed. As soon as the Hordika venom entered Thukor's bloodstream, he was ready for it. Though the chemical agent worked fast, his immune system worked faster, immobilizing and engulfing the hazardous particles while creating antibodies and immunity to them at the same time. It came as a great surprise to the Visorak, then, when Thukor burst forth from the cocoon not as a bestial Hordika, but as a fighting foe even stronger than he was before. From then on no amount of venom could harm him, as he merely shrugged off the webbing blasts while blasting his enemies with subzero strikes.

 

However, the Visorak possessed one great advantage which the Sharaku and the Green One could not overcome: strength in numbers. For every Rahi that the heroes rendered unconscious, another two more came to take their place. And the Sharaku's strict adherence to the Toa creed, disarm, not kill, played into their enemy’s hands as the battle went on: those Visorak knocked out at the start of the battle would recover and rejoin the brawl as it went on. After about a half an hour of intense fighting, the situation had quickly reversed itself. The Green One was expelled from his sanctuary after several Visorak grabbed the log and tossed it into a tree, causing it to shatter to pieces. Slowly, the seven warriors were driven into a tight group in the center of the clearing, surrounded on all sides by hundreds of the spider soldiers.

 

Kryzok advanced with a hungry glint in his eye, staring balefully at the captured Sharaku. "Alright then, Sharaku, the Queen will speak with you now. And let me tell you, she is very, very displeased." Looking upward, the Visorak bowed, and Hanak and his team saw the enormously fat blue and orange matriarch sitting above them, observing all that had taken place. She did not look happy at all.

 

"Pwease, your Majesty, have mercy!" the Green One cried.

 

"Do you honestly think that I will even contemplate devouring you traitors?" Gorgorak stormed. "Oh no; not at all. I plan to dispose of you cleanly, and not by my own hand. You will face the wrath of the true overlords of Terra Nui, the very beings who identified your threat in the first place."

 

Hanak and his team suddenly felt deathly cold. They had always suspected who were behind the act of turning their former Visorak allies against them, and now they were certain. As Gorgorak pointed her pudgy foreleg, they could only turn in the direction it indicated with a mounting apprehension. The Visorak horde parted, and across from them, the Sharaku could see six familiar forms, claws and fangs bared, ready for battle.

 

Cracking his knuckles upon his giant cutlass, its tip buried in the earth, Daigolva looked triumphantly upon the captured heroes, while the other five Quntaino behind him appeared similarly fervent. "We meet again, Sharaku. And this time, it is we who shall be victorious."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 15
 
On the parapet of the Tai-Koro village wall, the blazing sun beat relentlessly down upon the sandstone ramparts, protodermis stockade, and granite fortifications. A few white, fluffy clouds plowed slowly across the sky, while a thin wind blew small whirlwinds of dust across the landscape of sparse trees and few bushes. Were any Matoran present, they would have taken a few minutes to appreciate the wild, rustic beauty of their surroundings. But there were no Matoran here, only Betshu — a thousand Sebau and Samiu, chained flails and sharp claws at the ready, pacing back and forth or crouching hidden in the battlements. They were watching, waiting.
 
They were not the only ones. On the heavily barricaded main entrance to the village, blocked off with heavy shields and protosteel plating, a tall being sniffed the air, its quick, alert eyes darting back and forth toward the horizon. It was approximately the size of a Toa, stick-thin and angular, with a starved, desperate look to it. The creature wore olive armor with the same kind of helmet as its Betshu brethren covering its head, and possessed a pair of spindly wings and wicked talons on its fingers and toes.  This being, Aagm, was a Nak, one of Apep's elite soldiers; and though it was not much more intelligent than the other troglodytes, it licked its large, tombstone teeth in anticipation of spilling the blood of its victims.
 
Clutching the spiked mace and jagged blade tighter, Aagm surveyed the area immediately behind it. Two other Nak were on duty as well. Taru roamed the area near the largest building in the village, Turaga Atemu's former abode, while the other, Seba, stayed near the sealed-off front of the Great Philae Temple. For days following the capture of Tai-Koro, the Betshu had tried to break into the sanctuary and seize the Sisterhood members holed up inside, but all of their efforts had been in vain. Those great doors were nigh impenetrable, as if Mata Nui himself had put an unbreakable spell upon his holy place. At any rate, the Scourge's minions had give up early on, and the Temple had remained in this state for months now. The Het-hert females had probably starved to death a long time ago, anyway.
 
Suddenly, a sound like thunder boomed nearby, startling the bored troglodytes and jarring them to attention. The Nak moved its head wildly, trying to identify the source of the commotion. But they could see nothing, with no movement coming from the dry scrub forests that surrounded Tai-Koro on three sides, nor anything approaching from the Hapi River in the distance. As they shifted their gaze back forward, however, they beheld a sight that they would never forget.
 
A titanic black and silver beast, monstrous in musculature and horrific in appearance, was galloping toward them at a fantastic speed. Its huge claws strode over the black earth with ease, while its spiky armored tail thrashed wildly and it pumped its horned head up and down, its eyes crazed with battle-lust and its fangs bared. This was what their brothers and sisters had warned them about, the nightmare creature, and their enemies had it completely under their control. Once more the Vatuka issued a ferocious roar that sent shivers down even the Naks' spines. And it was not alone. Behind this legendary steed, in a horde of two and a half hundred, ran the Matoran of Tai-Koro, yelling battle cries as they approached the home that had been forcefully and unjustly taken away from them. Chompshi, Vrael, Ausar, Auset, Sutekh, and Anpu led the group, weapons held high and ready for battle. Nebt-het and Lyse followed in the Stryda, which, due to its lack of drills, had been chosen to complement the frontal assault. It had no weapons on its chassis, but did not need them, as the vehicle blasted a shockwave made by the Toa of Sonics, a deadly sound barrage at a frequency only the troglodytes could hear — and Matoran could not, thereby saving their ears.
 
In addition, because of their ineptitude, the Betshu were unable to access and fire the ancient self-defense turrets installed along the outer walls of Tai-Koro. Nor could they rain arrows down upon the oncoming force, because they possessed no projectile weapons of their own. All they could do was wait for the first strike.
 
Whirling around to face the frantic, deafened, disoriented Betshu, who had not expected an attack of this magnitude, Aagm shrieked at the top of its lungs, even though the ruckus drowned it out. "The gate! We must protect the gate!"

 

But this was followed by a horrendous screech of metal, as the great doors were torn from their reinforcements and thrown inward, crushing several unaware Sebau in the process. While perfectly able to fend off a large army with battering rams, the entrance barriers had crumpled in the face of four tons of rock-hard muscle, sinew, and alloy-enhanced bone. The Vatuka's strength had simply been too great, and it, the Matoran, and the Toa now poured into Tai-Koro. When their foe descended on them, they were ready.
 

------

 
Below the battlefield, the Xcavator lurked in its tunnel, at an angle and ready to bore through the ground and emerge in the village square. Heru sat in the cockpit as usual, while Matoba, Heaka, Pacha, Nuukor, and Attar clustered behind him along with the other half of the Matoran army. They were waiting to get the telepathic signal from Chompshi, who would alert them as to when all the Betshu had gone from where the Temple was. Once everything was clear, they could dig up and into Tai-Koro, and free the captives inside.
 
"I just got the message!" Matoba said, holding his torch aloft yet again for illumination. "Let's get cracking!"
 
"Got it!" Heru yelled in response. He pressed the keys on the control panel of his vehicle, while the computer of the Xcavator analyzed the situation. Its prim voice came over the speakers. "Drilling imminent. Good luck."
 
With that, the massive grinding wheels began to revolve and do their work.
 

------

 
Inside the Great Philae Temple, all was silent. Its stone walls effectively blocked outside sound, so that the studious and reverent Sisters might find peace for inner contemplation of the meaning of the universe. But its halls were empty, its library unoccupied, its kitchen closed, and all rooms in the somber building had nobody in them. Instead, only the large main chamber of the Temple, filled with circular stone seats and with the grand shrine in its center, had any beings in it at all. They were all clustered around the shrine, sitting patiently; where, apart from occasional breaks to eat and sleep, they had sat, and sat, and sat for months, alone in the candle-lit darkness.
 
Uatchet, the mute visionary leader of the Het-hert resistance, knelt on the steps of the old shrine, sadly gazing at her charges. At her feet, Heqet, Renpit, and Thenenet huddled terrified in a pile, as they had often done during their captivity whenever they mentally relived the nightmare of the Betshu invasion. The three tame Rahi — the Makuta Hound known as Wild Fang Tooth, the Ohee adopted by Bast, and Heru's old Lohrak named Shemsu — lay together nearby, waiting for orders from their mistresses. Sekhet, in her feigned feebleness, paced anxiously along the marble floor, her hand razors wrung in frustration. She wanted out, desiring the thrill of the fight. The theater of war was her home as much as the stronghold of peace.
 
Bast, on the other hand, was active. She had gone to the eating hall to get food several times that day, chased the Ohee around for a while, and now was leaning on one of the large stained-glass windows to check their outside surroundings. Previously, for the long duration of their imprisonment, nothing really had changed in the village square apart from the change in the Betshu guard. But now, she saw something out there, something that filled the jovial face of her Kanohi Rau with rapture.
 
"Everyone, look! There's a battle going on outside, a really big one, with Sebau and Samiu and even some Nak all over the place along the walls and in the streets because the Matoran have returned and have come to take back Tai-Koro! They have some sort of giant Rahi thing and a big black contraption with them and Toa even, some of them being the Toa Septiu and some whom I've never seen before, but that's okay because we're going to be free! Free! Pretty much." Barely stopping to take a breath, she ran back to Uatchet and the others, her golden cape flapping behind her.
 
"Are you sure, Bast?" Sekhet asked, as she and Uatchet rushed over to the window where Bast had first seen outside activity. Along with the other three Av-Matoran, who had just stirred and were happy for the first time in weeks, they raced around to each window to see what was going on. But indeed, they could see a total brawl taking place outside, with Matoran friends they hadn't seen in years fighting Betshu warriors with a furious determination. Though badly outnumbered, they seemed to be holding their own, especially with the help of the Toa. Indeed, the Sisters could clearly see Ausar, Auset, Anpu, and Sutekh, and thought they saw Nebt-het in the Stryda at one point; but they were not familiar with the tall Toa of Electricity and the bulky Toa of Crystal fighting alongside them. Shemsu and the Ohee seemed terrified of the Vatuka, and cowered visibly whenever they heard one of its roars.
 
After a few minutes, they were able to see exactly what was occurring. Turaga Atemu was evidently safe and sound in the Dahkla Oasis where he had said he would go, and with the help of a new Team of Toa, the Toa Septiu had freed all of the Matoran of Tai-Koro imprisoned beneath the Ta-She Lowlands. With this force eager for revenge, they must have attacked the village that very day, without the Sisters knowing it. And there appeared to be a method in this madness, for the skirmishes were taking place extensively along the walls of the village and in the streets, near the Turaga's house. No Betshu were near the Temple at all, and it had an empty buffer zone about ten bio around it on all sides.
 
Uatchet, as wise as she was, would not have paid any attention to this anomaly were it not for the barking of Wild Fang Tooth. The unsightly Makuta Hound was no longer sitting on its haunches in a corner, but now barked madly in front of the sealed front door of the temple, panting and jumping up and down.
 
"Whatever is the matter, boy?" she asked, as the intelligent hound could understand her hand gestures. Wild Fang Tooth merely looked at her with a pleased grin, its long tongue hanging over its canines, and continued its barking.
 
"Wait a minute. Something is happening outside," Sekhet said. Peeping through the small, circular pane, she observed a plume of dirt burst forth from the ground in front of the Temple, followed by a large amount of rock bursting upward. The spinning blades of a great drilling machine emerged from underground, churning the earth around it as the vehicle righted itself and moved forward on a pair of clunky treads. From behind it, another two hundred and fifty Matoran jumped out of the tunnel and ran into the fray to assist their brothers and sisters against the Betshu. However, another five Toa emerged from the tunnel as well, all undoubtedly strange members of the new team.
 
"Alright, captive Sisters! We're coming in to rescue you!" Attar yelled. Behind him, Heaka pulled from her neck a string with an object of great importance at the end: the keys to the Great Philae Temple. Nekhebet had given it to her at the Oasis, having previously received it from Uatchet before she had fled the fallen village with the Turaga and Toa Septiu. Her nimble fingers deftly put each key in its specific lock, opening the dozen or so deadbolts in less than a minute.
 
Attar, Matoba, Nuukor, and Pacha then grabbed one of the stone doors and pulled it open with a ponderous creaking. Uatchet, Bast, and the rest of the Sisters saw a beautiful young Toa of Water, who knelt down and held out the keys. "I think these belong to you, wise one," she said to Uatchet, who reverently took them and put them around her neck, curtsied as best she could with her voluminous cape, and made several gestures.
 
"She pantomimes her thanks, 'cause she's mute, but everyone can understand her when one of us is around. Pretty much," Bast said, as she and Sekhet crowded around their rescuers. "I'm Bast, by the way, and these are . . ." She trailed off as the cockpit of the Xcavator opened with a hiss, and a familiar green and silver form stepped out and bowed gallantly at the Sisters.

 

"The Toa Terra know who you are, Bast. Atemu, Akito, and Pelekua filled them in on everyone in Tai-Koro."
 
"Heru! We thought we would never see you again!" Sekhet chimed, embracing the Toa of Gravity. "And Turaga Sah Akito and Pelekua are here!? I thought they were never heard from again!"
 
"A lot of things need to be explained, ladies," Matoba said, "and we will get to those later. At the moment, we have a battle to win. Heqet, Renpit, and Thenenet, you take the Ohee and Shemsu to the kitchen and hide there. Barricade yourselves in, while we will close the door so that the Betshu won't suspect anything. Uatchet, we need you to relock the door until the battle is over and patrol the inner hallway, to make sure that no Betshu can come in. Sekhet, Bast, and Wild Fang Tooth, we need you to guard the outside of the building. We have brought some reinforcements to assist you." Behind him, the Av-Matoran guards, Meti and Shna, appeared, raising their pikes high in a salute.
 
While the three timid Sisters got themselves and their pets to safety, Uatchet closed up the Temple once more, with Heru staying with her to protect the Matoran inside. The Toa Terra took up defensive positions around the Temple. Meanwhile, Bast mounted her Makuta Hound, and Sekhet took up a position with the two guards, a dangerous grin on her Pakari. Being imprisoned for many months had not fazed them in the slightest. They were ready to defend their home village, ready to fight — and ready to win.

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 16

 

Chompshi and Vrael found themselves facing a particularly frenzied foe. The Nak Aagm, who had been on top of the armored ramparts when the Matoran army first poured into the village, had been singled out by these two Toa to be defeated in short order. The elite Betshu, however, fought with the tenacity of Kinloka caught in a kitchen. Chompshi and Vrael had heard from their Turaga that a single Nak was more than a match for even a seasoned Toa; but while together they had a good chance of defeating him, they occasionally had to fend off any Sebau and Samiu that managed to come up and try to support their superior. The other two Nak, Taru and Seba, were tussling with the Toa Septiu in the village square below, while elsewhere the Vatuka ran amuck, trampling any Betshu in its path, the Stryda scuttled around blasting its deafening sound barrage, and the Matoran were fighting lesser troglodytes all over the place.

 

"I tell you, Vrael, this has got to be one of the strangest fights I've ever been in," Chompshi yelled at his friend, as the pair used their pole-arms to deflect a slashing wing strike from Aagm. "We are up here on a tall wall with little elbow room and a ten bio drop to the ground should one of us slip. The situation was less odd when we battled Ruhktar and Kyraikk forty years ago!"

 

"Regardless of how we are fighting, this opponent is fairly weak compared to ruffians such as the Vorukaia. And besides," he glanced at the Nak, "he's probably out of practice against Toa. Nor does he know our hidden strengths."

 

"Toa?" Aagm sneered at the two. "I eat Toa for breakfast!"

 

"If that's the case," Chompshi said, "try to chew on this." Pivoting around, he parried Aagm's claws with his thunder lance while simultaneously letting loose a charged blast from his electric cannon. The ball of energy caught the Nak squarely in the chest, and as he was pushed backward, Vrael whacked him hard across the head with a powerful blow of his grapple staff. Aagm crumpled to the parapet, and before he could rise, he was immobilized by a crystal shell that covered his limbs.

 

"What should we do with this one?" Vrael asked. "The Nak are stronger than your average Betshu, and simply knocking them out might not dispatch them easily."

 

Before Chompshi could respond, however, a strange form bounded up the stone steps that led up to the parapet, letting loose a weird cry halfway between a roar and a howl. The Rahi was black and silver in color and possessed the mass of three Toa, with a long whip-like tail, a snag-toothed jaw, and drooping ears that flapped wildly as it ran. Wild Fang Tooth was in hunting mode, ready to pounce on and maul anything in its path. Aagm, still winded from Vrael’s blow, tried to scramble away as fast as he could, but to no avail; the Makuta Hound puppy pounced on him and seized the Nak in its teeth, tearing at the foul Betshu until the being ceased moving.

 

"You Toa guys may have a code that prevents you from taking a life, but my pet here has no such qualms, it seems. Pretty much," Bast said, sitting jauntily atop her mount, who was still worrying at Aagm’s body. "Of course, the other Matoran and I just want to beat the heck out of these Betshu, tie 'em up, and round them out of the village, whether or not in one piece. I'm sure you can appreciate that."

 

"Indeed," Chompshi replied with a dry chuckle, both taken slightly aback and amused by this sudden appearance. "Well then, miss, Vrael and I have some business to take care of. We could use an extra fighter — or two."

 

"I'll take you up on that offer," Bast said with a smile. "There are other Betshu on the walls that we could take out, 'cause we can probably just knock them over the fortifications or have Wild Fang Tooth here gnaw on them or some other such method, but in either case let’s get going, or else we are going to still be severely outnumbered, and then I'd have to take them all out myself."

 

Vrael looked bemusedly at the feisty Av-Matoran. "Ausar was right. You are quite the talker, aren't you?"

 

"Yep. Pretty much."

 

------

 

Meanwhile, near the home of Turaga Atemu, the Toa Septiu had been engaging the remaining two Nak in addition to hordes of Sebau and Samiu. At least, most of them were; Ausar and Auset had rushed over to the front of the Great Philae Temple to make sure that the rescue effort of the Sisterhood of Het-hert members had gone smoothly.

 

Surprisingly, thanks in part to the Vatuka, who would either crush Betshu beneath its massive claws or even bite them in half, they managed to reach the front of the temple smoothly, without encountering any of Apep's warriors on the way. Once there, however, Ausar and Auset found their Terra Nui brethren fighting off a large group of Betshu.

 

"Hello, Toa! It is good to see you again after all these years!" Sekhet yelled enthusiastically, as she held a Samiu in a headlock while repeatedly kicking it. Once the troglodyte had been sufficiently beaten up, she pushed it into a crowd of Sebau before Attar froze them in their tracks.

 

"The feeling is mutual, my dear," Ausar grinned, raising his Kepesh and bringing out the Tet stick from where it had been slung behind his back. Likewise, Auset armed herself by joining her two short swords together into a longer weapon. Together, the two Toa Septiu began dueling with the Betshu furiously, going back-to-back to form a whirling tornado of onslaught. Their Kanohi powers also came into play: Ausar commanded a nearby Inikirikori to thoroughly shock his opponents, while Auset channeled her powers to ensnare her adversaries in coiling vines. Receiving support from Matoba, Heaka, Attar, Nuukor, Pacha, and Sekhet, they were able to successfully repel all of the Betshu attackers in a relatively short amount of time.

 

Once the area around the Great Philae Temple was temporarily clear of Sebau and Samiu, Auset walked over to Sekhet. "Now that we have a moment of respite, Ausar and I would like to get our bearings regarding the liberation. Are the other Sisterhood members safe?"

 

"Oh yes, they are in good shape," Nuukor said. "The three scared girls — I can't remember their names, Kemet is such a strange Matoran dialect — are in the kitchen along with their Rahi pets. Uatchet and Heru are inside to make sure no Betshu can get past the doorway. And Bast, she's probably off fighting on Wild Fang Tooth even as we speak."

 

"Thanks. At least this phase of the operation has gone smoothly," Ausar responded. "Right, Auset?"

 

Auset wasn't listening. Just to put her gentle heart at ease, the Toa of Plant Life was using her telekinetic abilities to scan the Temple from floor to roof, looking for the mental signatures of the Het-hert members to make sure that they were indeed unharmed. Breathing a sigh of relief, she felt that Heru and Uatchet were enjoying a good conversation inside the insulated main annex, while Heqet, Renpit, and Thenenet were up and about. Having raided a cookie pot in the kitchen, they were now happily sharing their spoils with the Ohee and Shemsu. Everything was well.

 

Suddenly, however, Auset paused. Without warning, a new beacon appeared inside her peripheral mental field, drawing her attention to it. This object, whatever it was, seemed to be located in the very catacombs of the Great Philae Temple itself, effectively hidden from the rooms above it. She could not detect any sentience in this strange thing, but nevertheless, she had not the slightest idea of what it was that emitted this strange energy signature. Perhaps Uatchet and Nekhebet knew what this bizarre curio was and why it was there. In either case, secret artifact or not, now was not the time for prying into the Temple.

 

"Auset? Auset, come on!" Ausar's strident voice brought his teammate back to reality.

 

Blinking a few times and shaking her head, Auset nodded at her friend. "I heard you, I just wanted to check to make sure everyone was okay. No problems here."

 

"Good," Ausar said, whirling his Tet stick in his palm with a deadly precision. "Now we can catch up to those maddening Nak elsewhere in the village. Thank you for your vigilance, Toa Terra, but Auset and I must be off." Together, the Toa all clanked fists in the traditional gesture of comradeship, and then Ausar began to run off toward Turaga Atemu's house.

 

As she followed behind him, though, Auset's mind kept wandering back to the strange relic beneath the Temple. What is it? And more importantly, what is it doing there?

 

------

 

The struggle for Tai-Koro raged on throughout the day, with the eternal sun slowly grinding its way across the center of the sky. By mid-afternoon, the sky had become cloudier, but the heat still was heavy in the air, with an unusually high humidity alongside it. Sweat poured from the Matoran and Toa's brows, but the warriors fought on as bravely and as resolutely as before.

 

And by then, the tide of battle had been turned in their favor. From a force of over one thousand Betshu that morning, only about one hundred or so now carried on Apep's command. Sebau and Samiu lay in piles everywhere, their weapons and bones crushed. The Vatuka, in its blood-crazed state, had killed, wounded, and maimed dozen upon dozen of the rebellious fiends, biting them in half or slashing them with its razor-edged claws and hammering tail. One brave Samiu, who had managed to climb onto the Vatuka's back and could barely hang on, soon found the tables turned on him when the Rahi slammed its flank into the sturdy village wall and splattered the hitchhiking being like a Bula berry.

 

Nor did they find a more merciful pounding from the Toa. With the broadcasting Stryda as support, the Toa Septiu and Toa Terra cut through the Betshu ranks with ease, their Kanohi masks messing with their enemies' minds and their elemental powers knocking out the troglodytes in all sorts of waves, pulses, and blasts. Those Betshu not dispatched by the Toa found themselves face-to-face with the Matoran of Tai-Koro; who after being imprisoned by these aggressors for years, found great joy in the ability to beat them in hand-to-hand combat.

 

As the sun sank to just above the horizon and the sky turned lavender and russet in color, there was no hope for the Betshu. Now less than thirty remained active, and they were herded into a tightly-packed group in front of the gates of Tai-Koro, surrounded on all sides by advancing Toa and Matoran. Seba and Taru, the two Nak, had avoided major fights for the duration of the battle, but now had been caught and bound, thrown in front of their rank and file soldiers by an emotionless Nuukor and Pacha.

 

Chompshi strode up to this rag-tag bunch of survivors, with Ausar behind him on his left once again astride the Vatuka, and Bast as reinforcement on the right, riding her Makuta Hound. With a single shot of electricity from his cannon, the Toa Terra of Electricity silenced the Betshu's grunts and yaps. His voice boomed out across the village with a stern and grim air of command.

 

"Alright, you gutless, Makuta-bred filth! You are on our terms now, whether you like it or not, and there is not a chance in Karzahni that you can keep up your defense of this village. But, as we are honorable beings, we shall be merciful. You can either surrender, and leave here unharmed; or you can continue to fight, and you shall be swiftly knocked senseless. Your choice."

 

Going over to Taru and Seba, Vrael pulled up the head of the first captured Nak, putting his chainsaw at its throat. "First things first," he growled. "You there, tell us where your master and mistress have placed their fortress! If you talk, you can join the others and escape alive. Well, how about it?"

 

Taru sneered at the Toa of Crystal with contempt. "Dare you to think that the mighty Apep, ruler of all that he surveys, would entitle the location of his stronghold to us puny underlings? Ha! That information will never leave my mouth, not on your life!"

 

"So you won't tell us a thing?"

 

"Never!" Seba screeched.

 

"Very well, then," Vrael sighed. "Ausar, Bast, get your mounts ready to remove these creatures from our sight."

 

Before the Toa of Fate and the Av-Matoran could react, however, Seba and Taru suddenly freed themselves of their bonds. The two Nak had been sworn to secrecy, and would rather die before giving any clues as to where the Scourges dwelt. This they did. Seba and Taru slit each other's throats without a sound, before crumpling to the ground at Chompshi's feet.

 

"Great! Just great!" Sekhet grimaced, while the Toa and Matoran expressed similar looks of disgust. "That was a bad idea from the start. Betshu never give away anything. Atemu tried to interrogate one once, with less-than-stellar results. Let's just say it took weeks to fully eradicate the smell."

 

Nodding, Chompshi turned to the Sebau and Samiu. "Well, what about the rest of you? Will you give up and leave us in peace?"

 

The evil troglodytes shook their heads furiously, hissing and spitting at the Matoran.

 

"I was afraid of this," Vrael said. "Lyse, if you please."

 

Concentrating his power, the Toa of Air created a monstrous gust of wind, which picked the remaining Betshu off of their feet, took them several bio into the air, and blew them clean over the walls of the village. Before they could react, Meti and Shna shut the gate with a resounding crash. Meanwhile, Ausar summoned all of his Kanohi's strength to send a mental probe in a radius across the village area, signaling any Rahi nearby to congregate around the heap of troglodytes outside Tai-Koro.

 

The Betshu picked themselves up from the heap, battered, injured, and grievously angered. As they picked up their weapons and prepared for one last futile charge at their former prize, they did not notice the scuttling of arachnid claws and the shadows of two large forms around them. But by then, it was already too late. A Sebau at the rear of the group made the mistake of turning around — and was promptly skewered by a massive azure stinger, picked up and shook until he became limp. His fellow troglodytes, finally seeing the pair of blue and white nightmares, turned tail, abandoned rank, and ran.

 

True, the Betshu were fast, but not as fast as a Serqet-Jaga.

 

------

 

From the ramparts of the village walls, the Toa and Matoran observed this gristly spectacle, as the duo of nasty scorpion Rahi caught, disemboweled, and otherwise engulfed every last Betshu. Once the satiated Serqet-Jaga had lumbered off, and the sun began to set, the enormity of what had just happened sunk in. Dropping their battle instruments, the Matoran, Toa Terra, and Toa Septiu embraced each other, cheering and whooping in tear-filled, exuberant triumph.

 

The Turaga's plan had worked to perfection. With the fourteen Toa to lead them, and the Vatuka and vehicles as secret weapons, the Matoran of Kemet Nui had been able to finally free their village, their ancestral home, from the claws of Apep. At last, Tai-Koro was theirs once more.

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 17

 

A few days later, Sutekh sat on the fortified wall of Tai-Koro, intently watching the hustle and bustle in the village below. The Matoran, having triumphed and retaken their ancestral home from the claws of the Betshu, had eliminated all slimy traces of their troglodyte enemies and were now hard at work repairing their community.

 

From his vantage point, the Toa of Storms could see a great deal of what was going on. During the battle, many homes and businesses had caught fire or been hit by Toa powers and elemental attacks, and so now these residences were being repainted and patched up. Matoran on ladders and rope and pulley systems were adding new thatched or stone roofing to their houses, adding additional protodermis to the walls, or sweeping up the ashes and debris.

 

One of the most extensive efforts was being undertaken on Turaga Atemu's house. The large, elaborate dwelling had sustained a heavy beating from the Vatuka's rampage, including a partially-caved wall at which a Samiu had been flung, creating a heavy dent; and a partly-caved in roof and corridor from where the titanic Rahi had swung its heavily-armored tail. The Vatuka, of course, had been pacified by Ausar and Chompshi, and had been released into the desert scrubland surrounding the village to exist in a semi-wild state. Currently, it was peacefully masticating some mineral-rich rocks near the banks of the Hapi River. Meanwhile, the other two instruments of victory, the Xcavator and the Stryda, were parked in the tunnel directly beneath the center of Tai-Koro, in front of the Great Philae Temple. Here they would remain until further digging was needed.

 

From his perch on the wall, Sutekh smiled with satisfaction. Finally, he thought, Apep and Aso's evil influence has been removed from the village. The Scourges still live on, but most of their army is gone, and that is a good thing. Soon the time will come when we are rid of them forever.

 

But this thought was soon interrupted by another, and not one of his own. This voice in his mind was dry and dripping with malicious intent. Such a waste. Thirty Betshu remaining and you did not slaughter them, but let them go free. Where is the dignity in that?

 

Taken aback by this mental intrusion, Sutekh grabbed his weapon, Tekhtekh, and pulled its broad head towards him. The staff had been lying aside him on the parapet, and had previously been quiet before suddenly interrupting his thoughts like this.

 

"What are you doing?" Sutekh demanded, staring right at Tekhtekh's power orb. The sentient weapon remained motionless, but the vermillion jewel tucked snugly between its triple blades seemed to glow like the glare of a baleful eye. "You haven't talked for days up until now. I had thought I was finally rid of your bad vibes."

 

You Matoran and Toa are weaklings. Not killing any foes because of some code of honor. Wielding true power means that you deal with your enemies once and for all!

 

"What? You're acting ridiculous again," exclaimed Sutekh. "Just be quiet, you stupid stick, and don't add any more nonsense to my train of thought. I'm not afraid of you!"

 

Tekhtekh still glowered, but did as it was told. Stick!? You know that I am the Cursed Wand of Chaos, thank you very much!

 

Meanwhile, Sutekh had left the Tai-Koro wall and was now strolling through the village square admiring the rebuilding efforts. In addition, he would exchange greetings and small talk with various friends and Toa teammates he might encounter. Near a block of Matoran houses, for instance, he found Chompshi and Vrael. The two Toa Terra appeared to be immersed in some sort of power testing, with the Toa of Electricity summoning a stream of crackling electric energy that wound in shimmering geometric patterns around a mineral lattice being held in the air by the Toa of Crystal.

 

Looking this strange apparition up and down, Sutekh addressed Chompshi. "Still working on that elemental combination of yours?"

 

"Yes, indeed," Chompshi said. "Vrael and I are fine-tuning our powers to be able to stun and freeze an opponent at the same time!"

 

Satisfied, Sutekh moved on. In front of Turaga Atemu's house, he encountered the Turaga of Plasma along with the fellow elders Akito and Pelekua. The three Turaga Sah had returned to the village less than a day after it had been retaken, having looked after those Matoran too weak, young, or old to fight. Now they were judiciously supervising the reconstruction of Tai-Koro's damaged buildings. Sutekh also noticed that Ausar and Auset were talking to the Turaga as he arrived.

 

"Ah, there you are, Sutekh!" Atemu exclaimed warmly. "From what I heard, your storm powers and . . . um . . . staff were both quite effective at clobbering Betshu."

 

"Good news," Ausar said. "Only the Turaga house still needs minor repairs. All of the other dwellings and shops that were partly destroyed or burned have been fixed. Remarkably, the Great Philae Temple sustained no damage during the battle, but since it has been standing for thousands upon thousands of years, I'm not surprised."

 

"Sutekh," Auset spoke up, "there is something important that we must discuss. Our team members, I mean. I've notified Ausar already, and I just needed to find you. It's quite urgent, and involves the Great Philae Temple."

 

"Really?" Pelekua asked. "Then, Atemu and Akito, we probably should not interfere. Uatchet, I trust, is more skilled in these matters than us."

 

"Okay, sure." Sutekh responded. Ausar and Auset led him to the front of the temple, where Nebt-Het, Heru, and Anpu were already assembled. Uatchet and Nekhebet stood beneath the elaborate, carved stone archway that marked the main entrance, and were talking to the three Toa quietly, as if they feared being listened in on.

 

"Alright, now that all of us are here," Ausar said. "Auset, can you please tell us exactly what is going on?"

 

"Well, during the battle, shortly after defeating that group of Sebau and Samiu, right in front of this very spot, I discovered a weird energy signature far beneath the catacombs of the Great Philae. It appeared to be motionless, but exhibited an aura just as strong as any living Matoran or Rahi. I have a feeling that it is of monumental significance, but I do not know its true nature."

 

"That is why," she said, addressing Uatchet and Nekhebet, "elders of the Sisterhood, I beseech you for wisdom. If this object could indeed prove to be the key to defeating Apep, then you must entrust us with its secret. Ausar and I feel that the Toa Septiu will prove to be good guardians of this artifact's existence. We will keep it a secret." The other five Toa seemed quite surprised, but nodded determinedly.

 

Uatchet and Nekhebet looked at each other. A few moments passed. Then, silent as always, Uatchet made a series of hand gestures in rapid succession, exhibiting only a serene expression on her face.

 

"We feared this day would come many moons ago. Come with us."

 

Nekhebet then opened the huge doors with a creak, and the two Av-Matoran and Toa Septiu filed inside. When the doors shut again, no Matoran outside had overheard the conversation.

 

 

------

 

With the shadows on the walls growing larger and more enveloping the lower they went, the head of the local Het-hert and the Chronicler of Kemet Nui led the six Toa through the silent, sepulchral halls of the temple. Using only lightstone-topped candles for illumination, Uatchet and Nekhebet took the heroes past the library, and passed by the kitchen, dining hall, and sleeping quarters, to the Suva chamber below. In the Suva chamber Thenenet, Renpit, and Heqet were dusting and refurbishing some of the tapestries; Ohee and Shemsu were absent, instead playing outside with the younger Matoran. As for Sekhet, she was meditating in her own chambers, while Meti and Shna had taken a break from their Guard duties and were perusing some volumes in the library's annals of literature, history, and philosophy.

 

Once the group had reached the cellar entrance, however, they were accosted by a familiar pair of faces: Bast and Wild Fang Tooth. The energetic Av-Matoran, eagerly bouncing up and down while holding a half-eaten Madu fruit, seemed to be especially hyperactive. "Greetings, most exalted Sisters and Toa warriors! Are you going on an adventure? I like adventures!"

 

"Yes, we are, of sorts," Nekhebet said. Lowering her voice, she gestured downward and gave several hinting looks at Bast. "We are showing the Toa Septiu the . . . well, you know."

 

Bast, however, seemed to have forgotten. "The what?"

 

"You know, the . . . secret thing."

 

After a few moments of thinking hard, it finally dawned on Bast, who burst into laughter as Uatchet shook her head sadly and Nekhebet struck her forehead with her palm. "Oh, you mean that secret thing! I was under the impression we were talking about Turaga Pelekua's old copy of How to Eat Fried Ussal Crab!"

 

"No, obviously not," Nekhebet reprimanded. "Now, don't you have some business to attend to?"

 

Bast looked sheepish. "Well, . . . I kinda wanted to go with you. Pretty much."

 

Uatchet thought a moment, then nodded and gesticulated. "Very well, come with us. But I must warn you, Bast, this is a very important secret. If we tell you — again — you must promise not to let the word get out. The very safety of Kemet Nui depends on it."

 

The spunky Av-Matoran held up one hand. "I promise."

 

"Good. Let's move on."

 

The three Sisters and Toa Septiu reached the bottom of the cellar. Here the lightstone illumination revealed a hidden trapdoor, which had been partly concealed by a large woven rug. Uatchet pushed the rug aside, bent down, and then pulled out her set of keys that opened the various doors of the Great Philae Temple. Flicking all but one key to the bottom of the hoop, the leader of the Sisterhood then held the remaining metal instrument up to the light —  or rather half of it, as the key was partly broken off.

 

Nekhebet, as it turned out, held the other half. At Uatchet's beckoning, she twisted the top of her Chronicler's staff three times counterclockwise and cranked its tines to the left. In response, a shard of metal fell out: the remaining piece of key. She then gave it to Uatchet, who connected the pieces, deactivated the lock, and opened the trapdoor.

 

Here, it was nearly pitch-black. Fikou webs were everywhere, while old piles of mortar and rubble could be found in odd corners of the small, circular room. At the bottom of a curved stone stairway stood a single cylindrical pillar with a flattened top. A thin beam of sunlight, the only vestige of the outside world, flowed through a crack in the room's roof and fell upon an object resting on the center of the pedestal.

 

This was what Auset had detected.

 

Silently, the Matoran and Toa filed in a circle around the relic. It was a burnished, faded gold in color, with alternating bands of oxidized silver criss-crossing it. Matoran writing and strange Kemet runes could be seen etched along the bands. A faint glow seemed to emanate from the artifact, even though it contained no elemental powers itself, which filled the eyes of the Toa with fascination.

 

Uatchet picked up the antique and blew a few dozen millennia’s worth of dust off of it, before polishing it with her golden robes until it shone. "As you can see," she signed, "this object is of grave importance. Apep and Aso must never find it, or the Matoran of this island are doomed. If it falls into the hands of the Betshu then all hope is lost."

 

"We know so because of what the writing on the casing says," Nekhebet added. "The lettering and runes read, 'If the Two find this, then they will have won.' Apep and Aso are the only beings we call the Two. And although there is little explanation to it ... well, the ancient legends of our land have seldom been wrong."

 

"Don't worry, Nekhebet," Ausar said bravely. "My team will keep its knowledge safe. Isn't that right?" Auset, Heru, Nebt-het, Anpu, and Sutekh all vigorously nodded again, as did Bast.

 

The two matriarchal Sisters seemed satisfied. After placing the token back on its pedestal, they began leading the group back up to the Great Philae Temple and the surface. As they did so, however, there was one consciousness in the room that was not finished looking at the ancient artifact.

 

Even as Sutekh ascended the stairs to leave, Tekhtekh in his hands never once moved the gaze of its unholy red eye away from the curio. The orb was expressionless and motionless, as always. But if one were to stare into the jewel deeply, for a few minutes, one could perceive what it felt and saw. Unlike the honorable Toa, the sentient staff did not look upon the heirloom with admiration and reverence, but with hunger.

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 18

 

Hanak glared at Daigolva, choosing his words carefully as he spoke to the vermillion, reptilian Quntaino. "So this was your doing, eh? I should have known all along. No wonder you have filled the heads of these Visorak with lies. Since we Sharaku have been on Terra Nui for forty years, we would surely be of no threat to the order of the island. Any Matoran with half a brain could tell you that. Just take the Green One's word for it." In response to being brought up, the diminutive being pumped his head up and down timidly.

 

"What our leader says is the truth," Thukor added, holding up his hands in a peaceable gesture. "We mean you no harm, nor the Visorak — it is and has been you that have constantly been harassing us. Our mission to the Johmai Jungle was to try to find out why Gorgorak did not send a representative to the summit at our village to discuss the havoc being wreaked on the island; havoc which, I might venture, is again being caused by the six of you."

 

Captain Kryzok hissed and spat at the Sharaku, goaded by being protectively near the Quntaino. "What they said seems logical enough! Besides, the Battle of Terra Nui took place forty years ago, so do you think Visorak memory goes back that far? I think not! Regardless, you look evil to my horde brethren and me!"

 

"Don't listen to dem!" the Green One insisted. "We da true fwends of yous and Queen Gorgorak. Helpin da Quntaino's not gonna get you anywheres!"

 

"Enough!" Daigolva raised his clawed hand to silence any argument. "Regardless of how it came to be, the Visorak are most assuredly on our side. We can be very persuasive." He then leveled his broadsword and swung it in the air, as the other five Quntaino adopted similar combat poses. "And now the time has come for us to eliminate your threat!"

 

Daigolva and his teammates leaped forward, surrounded by Kryzok and his legions of Visorak. But the Sharaku and the Green One were ready for them. His extending fire sword engulfed in shimmering flame, Hanak moved to intercept Daigolva's blow. Metal clanged upon organic plating as the two beings sparred with their blades. Though Daigolva's raw muscle and brute strength made him undoubtedly the more physically powerful of the two, he had to constantly adjust for Hanak's quick strikes and parries and occasional fire blasts. The Sharaku, being smaller and more agile, could get between Daigolva's trunk-like legs and escape from a heavy-handed sword swing. In short, neither one was at an advantage.

 

Meanwhile, the other Sharaku and Quntaino were engaged in various skirmishes. Predacron had cornered Vukaz and was desperately trying to skewer the Sharaku of Water, who was valiantly setting up force field barriers and jets of freezing cold liquid to deter the attack. Kavan had his stone pincers locked with Icrizahk's massive crushing claws, and the two now tussled with each other, both desperately trying to shake off the other and knock them down. Sensing that there would be less danger underground, Rieka had tunneled beneath the soil and was trying to shoot chunks of earthen debris at the furious Nosfernox, who was madly trying — and failing — to dig her up, using his shields as oversized shovels. Thukor had locked Carcarinax's wings in ice, so that the ichthyoidal Quntaino could not gain an advantage in the air, and they had taken up dueling with fins versus bladed weapons on the ground instead.

 

A major problem that the Sharaku faced was that dozens of Visorak still lurked around, and the spider Rahi were overly eager to assist their newly-acquired masters. Zanta and the Green One, finding each other back to back, had paired up to confront Snimurai, Kryzok, and a couple of the Visorak officer's lieutenants. To evade the slippery spiders, Zanta had resorted to using a tactic of constantly teleporting around, blasting them with gusts of wind and smacking them with his air axes. The Green One likewise was moving around rapidly, trying to land a hit on Snimurai. Of course, the bug-like Quntaino well-remembered how the petite being had obtained the upper hand the last time they had fought, and was simultaneously wary of any of the Green One's tricks and desperate to defeat him.

 

"This is getting ridiculous!" Nosfernox bellowed, having gotten nowhere trying to excavate Rieka from her hiding place. "You Visorak, help me with this!" But no sooner had he uttered the statement and a couple of Rahi advanced on the heaps of earth than the pair of sharp tridents emerged from the soil, stabbing them in their underbellies. The Visorak shot away with yelps of pain, as Rieka gracefully pirouetted out of the hole and in front of the enraged, unstoppable Nosfernox.

 

"You could have been good Rahi and left the inhabitants of this isle alone," Rieka admonished softly. "But oh no, you just had to recruit our allies and make them your own. What exactly do you hope to accomplish here?"

 

"Nothing that you deserve knowing about," Nosfernox growled. Stepping forward and planting a broad foot into the ground, he swung out with a shield to club Rieka. The Sharaku of Earth, while unable to deflect his massive weapon with her own much-smaller tools, found a way to escape the blow. As she lunged out of the way of the incoming attack, Nosfernox's huge arm's momentum did not cease. To his surprise, he proceeded to carry the shield's impact all the way into the nearby duel taking place between Predacron and Vukaz. The avian Quntaino barely was able to issue a shriek of alarm before the huge implement smacked him straight in the jaw and floored him.

 

Vukaz, normally serious in expression, broke into a hearty laugh from behind his energy barriers. Rieka herself gave an amused giggle.

 

His keen eyes bulging out of their sockets, Predacron screamed in the face of his teammate as he scrambled to his feet. "What did you do that for, you fat warty pile of rubble? I was clearly involved in something here!" Nosfernox could only shrug in response, but this face-off did not last long. Turning, the two Quntaino cast their eyes angrily upon Vukaz and Rieka.

 

"Uh oh," Vukaz said. "Now that we've stumbled into each other's fights, we'd better team up against these menaces."

 

"Agreed," Rieka replied, and the four beings resumed their sparring.

A short distance away, Hanak and Thukor were still involved in their respective battles. The leader of the Sharaku, his sword constantly in motion deflecting Daigolva's blows while he ran around the reptilian being with supernatural speed, had to shout to the Sharaku of Ice just to say anything. "Hey Thukor, how's everything going?"

 

"Not too bad," Thukor admitted, blocking a slash from Carcarinax's talons with his ice blade. "I can't believe they'd ambush us like this, so we'd best hold our ground for as long as possible. Are you having any trouble?"

 

"No, not at the moment," Hanak said. Daigolva, seeing the Sharaku of Fire momentarily pause his bewildering fast streak, lunged out with his sword and swung his fist at the same time. Hanak parried the sword with one of his tools, but could only hold up the other weapon in the face of Daigolva's punch. The Quntaino's armored fingers closed around the flame-engulfed weapon tightly, causing a thick hiss as the scalding temperature ate away at the skin. Daigolva howled in pain, but then was able to successfully wrench Hanak's arm down, tusked teeth gritted. The Sharaku was brought to his knees, and Daigolva landed a body slam on him, trying to pin Hanak to the ground and knock him unconscious.

 

"Uh, we're having big problems over here!" Zanta yelled. He and the Green One were totally surrounded by dozens of Visorak and a malevolent Snimurai, who were just not being shaken off by their attack strategy. "I think we're going to have to find a way out of here and regroup at the village!" The other five Sharaku, though desperate enough to try to beat the Quntaino, knew that he was right. There were simply too many Visorak aiding their enemies, and if time wore on the combined power of the spider Rahi and the keystone-born foes would overwhelm the Sharaku. If that happened, all hope would be lost.

 

"You'll never escape!" Kryzok said gleefully, as he watched Hanak and Daigolva wrestle nearby him. "My minions! Web them!"

 

"Hang on a second, I gotta stwategy," the Green One whispered to Zanta. Standing tall — as tall as he could stand, at least — before the menacing, oncoming horde, he let loose a shrill, high-pitched whistle. The Visorak, having never heard such an unearthly sound before, winced in pain as it hit their eardrums. Gorgorak, Kryzok, and even the Quntaino paused at the sound.

 

But the Sharaku had heard it before. Within moments, they could make out a large, bulky form crashing through the bushes toward the Green One at an incredible velocity. It was the Bladetort, who had helped take the Green One and the Sharaku to the Visorak's forest hideout and who had been peacefully grazing a kio or so away when it had been summoned. Realizing that its master was in mortal danger, the massive tortoise hadn't become inflamed to this degree since the Battle of Terra Nui forty years earlier; and that was but an hour ago in the Bladetort's very long life span. Now, as it charged into the clearing, the beast that normally gave only snorts and rumbles gave what could only be described as a roar.

 

The Visorak did not know what to expect. Once they had seen the Bladetort their initial response was to charge, but they were met by six dangerous, razor-sharp limbs like hacksaws that bristled with serrated spines. Three Visorak were cut in half on impact; others were trampled below the Bladetort's feet or hurled into tree trunks. The Bladetort's goal was clear. Within seconds it had cleared a path to the Green One and Zanta.

 

"Retreat!" Hanak cried, springing up and out of Daigolva's death grip. Now was the Sharaku's chance. As the Quntaino and Gorgorak watched the scene with stupefied awe, the six heroes broke free and ran as fast as they could to the frenzied Bladetort. The Green One had already jumped onto his battle-mount's back, and Thukor, Vukaz, and Kavan clambered up behind him onto its shell. Zanta, Rieka, and Hanak, unable to fit, used their own methods of rapid locomotion as well. Before the Visorak's very eyes, the Bladetort and the three Sharaku on foot beat a hasty retreat. Momentarily, they had disappeared into the trees.

 

Their quarry having once again eluded them, the Quntaino were livid. Daigolva threw his sword on the ground and punched a nearby cycad, causing the plant to topple. Gorgorak herself could not believe what had just happened. "That was impossible! You Quntaino told us that this plan would be foolproof. Now the Sharaku have slipped through their fingers, and we have lost our chance!"

 

"Ah, but every defeat presents a new opportunity." From behind a grove of palms, Argentaros strode into view. The silvery alpha Quntaino had been hidden there for the entire battle, and had watched and overseen every move in its duration.

 

Daigolva knelt in servitude, hands upon his sword. "Once again I have failed you, Argentaros. The red Sharaku was almost mine. I am sorry."

 

Waving his hand benevolently, Argentaros bade his follower stand up. "Arise, Daigolva. Fear not, you are forgiven."

 

Captain Kryzok, humbled by the awe-inspiring presence of his leader, inched forward and gave an awkward cough and grin. "So, that means we have another chance, right, Master?"

 

Argentaros's crystalline scarlet eyes betrayed no anger. He just calmly stared at the hapless Visorak while caressing the living whiplash coiled around his forearm. "Indeed our victory is nigh. But you will not partake in it. Failure is something I cannot tolerate, Kryzok. I have no more use for you and you must suffer the consequences. Begone. You are dismissed from any future campaigns."

 

Kryzok seemed taken aback by this. His bravado noticeably diminished, the upset Roggarak skulked away with a pout, clambering up a tree trunk and disappearing into the tangle of vines and webbing.

 

Argentaros then walked over to Gorgorak, addressing the overweight Queen with an air of cold command. "In the future, Your Majesty, I expect that the hordes will be more willing to follow my orders." He then turned to the hordes grimly. "Let that be a lesson to all of you. Serve us well, for my grand vision of the future will not have room for upstart spiders. I take it you will not wish to follow the example of your former captain here." The Visorak nodded dutifully in response.

 

"Now, what are your incipient plans, Argentaros?" Carcarinax inquired. "The six of us are ready to carry out your bidding. As is your army."

 

Argentaros looked off into the far distance with steely eyes. "The time has come for us to move swiftly to strike our enemies. There can be no more wasted battles or last-minute escapes. This will end in the village of the Matoran once and for all. Today, we shall decide the fate of Terra Nui."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 19

 

Things were going well on Kemet Nui, but the three Turaga Sah still had one phase of the plan that they had not put into action. In order to fully match Apep's army in strength, the citizens of Tai-Koro still needed to recover an enclave of their friends who had taken up hiding near the Cliffs of Manu a long time ago. These Matoran would provide valuable fighting talents, as they had managed to elude the Betshu for so long. Now that their home village was safely in the hands of the Toa, however, Turaga Atemu suggested that a team of Toa and a few warriors journey to these crags, get the fifty or so Matoran out of hiding, and take them safely back to Tai-Koro.

 

Sutekh and Anpu had been chosen to lead this expedition. Horgah would accompany them, as one of her close friends was one of the Matoran in charge of the missing band. And finally, ten other fighters directed by the Av-Matoran guards Meti and Shna would provide backup in case a group of Betshu attacked on the way.

 

That is, if a small group of Betshu attacked. Sutekh was pretty sure that any Betshu horde they might encounter would outnumber their force five to one — and those would be the best possible odds. The two Toa Septiu would have to come up with a pretty good plan if the enemy outnumbered them on an even greater scale.

 

So now the Toa of Storms and the Toa of Magnetism found themselves on the barren, rocky terrain that marked the southernmost part of the Great Cliffs of Manu, on Kemet Nui's northwestern shoreline. Sutekh, Anpu, and their team were still rather inland, with no saltwater visible beyond the horizon. But they knew that the ocean was close, for they could hear the faint pounding of the waves on the black beaches several kio away. Occasionally a Nui-Bauk would scream in the sky or some Rock Raptor pack would run along in the distance with a chorus of roars, but apart from that the area was relatively silent.

 

Anpu had one of Turaga Atemu's maps, which he was peering at quizzically. Navigation wasn't exactly his specialty, and he had barely been to this part of the island before. "Hey, Horgah, I'm confused. The parchment says that there should be a cave right in front of us, and yet I can't see anything that might be close."

 

"Give me that!" Horgah interrupted, taking the scroll from Anpu's hands. "Pay attention! You've been reading the map upside down! The place we're looking for is in those bluffs up there."

 

"Oh, yeah. That would be it."

 

Sutekh, meanwhile, stood by himself away from the group, looking up at the steep slope. He held Tekhtekh tightly, not sure entirely why. Though he himself had been in good spirits for most of the day and was looking forward to rescuing the Matoran, the Wand of Chaos had not spoken a thing since Uatchet had shown the Toa Septiu the relic. That either meant the weapon was furious at Sutekh, or it was completely lost in thought, both of which often happened. Then again, Tekhtekh criticized almost everything that Sutekh did, so the Toa of Storms didn't really give it a second thought.

 

After a few minutes, with Meti and Shna keeping a close eye out for any evil troglodytes in the distance, the party made their way up to a large, vertical rock face at the crest of a tall butte. Here, to the untrained Betshu eye, there was no evidence of anything out of the ordinary. But Horgah's newly-improved vision could discern an amalgamation of rocks, piled on top of each other and sealed in with sand, which covered up what had to be a Matoran-sized hole in the stone. This had to be the way the fifty-odd villagers had gotten inside the cavernous rock formation and network of underground passageways, which they had sealed up afterward. It was obvious that the pent-up Matoran could still breathe — Anpu used his magnetic powers to scale the bluff and found a small air hole at the top. It was too small for any Betshu, but big enough that air could effectively cycle through the natural formation; and it was probable that the Matoran could somehow get food from inside their cramped quarters as well. Horgah wasn't sure whether her village friends would still have their health or wits about them, but everyone needed their assistance, and she was willing to try.

 

Gingerly, Horgah removed a large, rectangular piece of mortar at eye level. Holding a lightstone up to the crevice, she then looked inside as best she could and issued forth a loud call. "Hello in there! Anyone home?"

 

As she withdrew her face, a pair of mauve eyes appeared at the opening, fringed by a red Kanohi. "Horgah? Is that you? Mata Nui, I thought that you were all captured by the Betshu! We've been hiding here all these years to escape them!"

 

"I'm fine, Jezira, I'm fine. The Toa Septiu and a new team of Toa from Terra Nui helped liberate us! We've retaken the village and beaten back Apep and Aso's hordes. Are you all right?"

 

"Oh, we can't complain. Food is plentiful if somewhat repetitive and lacking in taste, water's not an issue, and there's enough room for all of us. There's no Rahi in this part of the cave, which has made it a bit lonely down here, but we've got each other for company. But enough of that! Help me get these stones out of the way, and then all of us can see the outside world again!"

 

With Sutekh, Anpu, and the other Matoran's help, Horgah removed as many pieces of mortar as she could. Jezira and his companions on the other side did the same thing. Within minutes, the barricade was down, and the rescue team parted as the crimson and violet Ta-Matoran emerged, followed shortly thereafter by his two-and-a-half-score bunkmates. Both groups of Matoran hadn't seen each other for a long, long time, and so they took a few moments to celebrate the reunion.

 

They were suddenly alerted, however, by a sharp cry of alarm. At the edge of the cliff, Meti and Shna had sighted something rapidly approaching. With a feeling of dread, the Toa and Matoran watched as a column of Betshu congregated around the foot of the cliff, and continued to advance rapidly.

 

"Oh, no," Horgah said. "There's over a hundred of them!"

 

"That's bad," Jezira admitted. "Even with all of us combined, there's no way we could possibly fight them off without suffering losses. I say we run for it."

 

"If we did that, it wouldn't be long before they'd catch up to us," Anpu warned. "I've got a better idea. I'll take the lot of you and we'll head for Tai-Koro the way we came, while Sutekh draws their attention away from us. It's not that far, and we can take cover in the scrub landscape that leads to the village should any stray patrols go after us. In a pinch, I can heal up anyone who gets too tired. What do you say?"

 

The Matoran as a whole liked that idea. Anpu then addressed Sutekh. "How are you on good distractions?"

 

Sutekh puffed out his chest proudly. "You're looking at the master of diversions. Good distraction is my middle name!"

 

"Alright, then. Come on, lets get moving."

 

As Anpu, Horgah, Jezira, and the rest retreated down the back of the bluff and sped toward Tai-Koro as fast as they could, Sutekh leveled his weapon at the advancing troglodytes. Previously, Ausar and Auset had taken all the credit for the Toa Septiu’s accomplishments in the struggle to retake Tai-Koro. Now, the playing field would be leveled. It would be his moment to shine.

 

"Alright, Tekhtekh, don't fail me now!" Sutekh sent some lightning bolts and dust devils at the Betshu for starters, then whipped up a few small tornadoes to suck up the oncoming Betshu. Next, to give the real force something to worry about, he raised Tekhtekh and prepared to unleash the staff's most devastating attack. With full power, it could release four beams of brilliant energy that could paralyze foes in their tracks. Now all he had to do was wait for it to charge.

 

Tekhtekh, however, had other plans. Though Sutekh was willing it to fire, the Wand of Chaos's orb remained unlit and the staff spoke to its wielder in a dark and brooding tone. I'm tired of this. You have proven to be a disappointment, Sutekh. My true potential has been wasted on a pathetic figure like you.

 

"What!?" Sutekh screamed at his unwilling weapon. "I order you to blast them! Do as I say, this instant!"

 

I'll do no such thing. From now on, I will make the decisions around here. And I say that it is time to find a new master!

 

With that, the staff did something it had never done in all its years of service to Sutekh: it moved. Swiveling around in his hands so that its triple points faced the Toa's belly, Tekhtekh released the pent-up energy contained in its orb and hit him head-on with a scarlet wave of light. Sutekh, hit squarely by the blast, was knocked into the rock wall hard. He got up just as the staff had clattered to the precipice.

 

"Tekhtekh! Come back here! Don't leave me, I need you!"

 

That would be the general idea. Farewell, Sutekh. The next time we meet will be in far less fortuitous circumstances, I assure you. Tekhtekh then began to rotate itself again so that its heavy weapon-head was positioned over the cliff. And then it fell.

 

Sutekh ran to the edge, arm outstretched in an attempt to grab the staff. But by then, it was already too late. Tekhtekh was in free fall and was using concentrated energy blasts to propel itself downward from the cliff at rapid speed. Hitting the ground, it began to roll, using its malevolent life force to spin its way over to the Betshu's feet.

 

At first, Sutekh thought that the evil weapon might use its powers to kill all the Betshu right then and there. It was, after all, bloodthirsty enough to do it. But Tekhtekh was at work: the glowing jewel meant it was attempting to communicate with the troglodytes. Already they had formed a circle around the fallen wand to examine this new find.

 

"No!" Sutekh shouted in despair. The Sebau and Samiu didn't hear him, though; all their attention was on Tekhtekh. By now, Anpu and his charges would already be halfway to Tai-Koro. The ruse had worked, so that part of the plan had been a success. Sutekh, on the other hand, knew that he would be remembered among his team not for some great victory, but for a catastrophic loss. He was spared by the Betshu this day; but he had lost his greatest asset, and one of the Het-hert's most critically-kept secrets.

 

Tekhtekh and the vital knowledge it carried were now in the hands of the enemy.

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 20

 

"What do you mean, you lost it?"

 

Turaga Atemu paced back and forth, unable to comprehend exactly what Sutekh was telling him. The three Turaga Sah, the Toa Septiu, the Toa Terra, and the recently-freed Matoran led by Jezira were all congregated inside Atemu's spacious house, where the Toa of Storms just arrived to tell the assembled crowd that he had lost Tekhtekh. Ironically, Anpu, Horgah, Meti, Shna, and the fifty-odd Matoran had all just arrived back at Tai-Koro less than an hour earlier. As a result, the joyful reunion of the villagers with their brethren who had been sealed in a cave for years on end had been interrupted by what Sutekh had hailed as dire news.

 

"Yeah, what's going on, Sutekh?" Anpu asked. "This all sounds very strange to me. I thought you scared off those Betshu after my group escaped, just like you said you would."

 

"Well, it's like this," Sutekh said, trying hard to keep his composure. Currently two trains of thought were wracking his brain, each one exerting a powerful influence. On the one hand, he wanted to scream in frustration at losing Tekhtekh, his Tekhtekh; the staff of power that he had grown to use like an extension of his arm; the weapon that issued forth storm surges to smite Mata Nui’s enemies; the sentient being who he had grown to accept as his equal, even if he didn’t respect the egotistical metal instrument or admire its greedy, bloodthirsty tendencies. And on the other, he felt like breaking down to weep out of sadness, for he knew now that the Betshu would be preparing their final assault on the free people of Kemet Nui thanks to the critical knowledge that Tekhtekh contained. But these did not really matter, for all would be revealed shortly, and then his teammates could plainly see the mental anguish he suffered.

 

"I started off the fight with some small-scale storms to stop the Betshu's advance, and then was about to fire some major heat rays when Tekhtekh went berserk. It shoved its evil thoughts into my brain, rattled off some mumbo-jumbo on how weak and pathetic I am and how it hasn't been happy serving as my weapon and how it wanted to seek a new master. Then it swiveled its head, blasted me in the chest, propelled itself forward, and rolled down the cliff, right into the waiting ranks of the enemy. That's what I mean by the statement that I lost Tekhtekh; or, more accurately, it escaped from me."

 

"Wait, hang on here a minute," Akito said. He could barely believe his ears. "You spoke of Tehktekh as if it had a mind of its own. Do you mean to tell us, impossible as it sounds, that that wicked-looking pole arm of yours is really, unmistakably, alive!?"

 

Here was the moment of reckoning. Sutekh, for lack of anything better to say, gave the honest truth. "Yes. Tekhtekh is alive, at least in the sense that it is self-aware." He heard the gasps and cries of disbelief issuing from the crowd of Turaga, Toa, and Matoran, and then continued. "It has a mind of its own, a frightening intelligence, and a telepathic connection to its wielder's brain for lack of being able to communicate with speech. It is power-hungry, self-centered, and battle-crazed And now, the Betshu have it in their grasp."

 

"But how do you know this?" Auset cried. "Even I, with my telepathic powers, have never been able to detect such intelligence. How long have you known about this ability, Sutekh? Did you keep the true nature of Tekhtekh secret from us for all this time?"

 

"That is correct," Sutekh admitted sadly. "You see, when Tekhtekh was found ages ago, it was just a tiny little stick that someone had buried in the ground and labeled as extremely dangerous. The note also called Tekhtekh the 'Cursed Wand of Chaos' and warned whoever might find it that the stick carried a great power. Being a foolish Matoran at the time it came into my possession, I had no idea of what consequences might befall and so took up Tekhtekh as my own, much to the weapon's chagrin. And when I became a Toa, so too did Tekhtekh metamorphose as well, into its present form. As I became skilled in combat, so too did I rely on Tekhtekh for many attacks, as the rest of my team knows. Somehow, the weapon and I got along, and it rarely put in a malicious mental comment on a good day, if I was lucky. I knew it thought I was weak and too soft-hearted, and I considered it to be brash and unscrupulous myself, so the two of us had a mutual understanding."

 

"But," he added, his voice becoming more urgent, "now Tekhtekh has decided to abandon me and join Apep! Uatchet, thanks to you and Nekhebet's knowledge which you shared with my team, Tekhtekh now knows the exact location of what Apep and Aso desire most! And I've got a horrible feeling it will side with the Atukam and lead that tyrannical pair right to us! It's all my fault!"

 

"Don't feel bad, Sutekh," Ausar said soothingly, putting his hand on his friend's shoulder. "It wasn't your fault this scheming weapon ran away. We should have suspected it was up to no good from the beginning — just looking at it gave me the shivers. And you should have told us about its strange properties as soon as you joined our team as well. But enough of that, we've got a serious problem here."

 

"Now, wait just a minute," Atemu’s voice carried an undertone of suspicion. He turned to Uatchet and Nekhebet, who were trying their best to appear preoccupied and look away nonchalantly. "What is it exactly that you Sisters are guarding in that cellar of yours that would be so important to the Betshu?"

 

"And how come we elders of the village have never heard of it?" added Pelekua.

 

Uatchet made some hand signs to reassure the Turaga. "Trust me, what Apep and Aso are after needs not be explained nor described. This heirloom is considered sacrosanct to the Sisterhood of Het-hert and will not be revealed to those who are not chosen by me. Suffice to say, all you need to know is that the King and Queen will do anything to possess it, even level the Great Philae Temple, burn Tai-Koro to the ground, and kill everyone who resides there."

 

"Mata Nui alive, that's terrible news!" Akito thundered. "We must warn the villagers as soon as possible! If Apep and Aso are gathering their army and are on their way to Tai-Koro even as we speak, then we need to prepare for battle immediately!" The Matoran inside Atemu's house all voiced their agreement, as did the huge mass of villagers outside who had been listening in on the hubbub.

 

"We will gladly join you in this fight," Jezira said at Horgah's side. "It will be a pleasure."

 

"But what about Tekhtekh? How will we keep it from revealing the secret?" Nekhebet asked.

 

"It is very likely that, if Tekhtekh seeks a powerful user, then Apep will have taken it as his own," Chompshi said sagaciously. "Therefore he and Aso will be relying on it to tell them where the artifact lies. What we must do is simple: the King and Queen of the Betshu must be stopped at all costs and defeated once and for all. Only then will the hordes fall and Tai-Koro be spared."

 

"And Tekhtekh?" Sutekh inquired.

 

"We must destroy it."

 

"Are you out of your mind!?" the Toa of Storms shouted. "I will be weakened as it is by not having Tekhtekh at my side! Can't we just take it back after defeating the Betshu?"

 

"Tehktekh was probably never on your side, Sutekh," Vrael said. "It must have been planning this from the beginning. Destroying it and defeating Apep and Aso are the only way we can keep those two Atukam from becoming exceedingly powerful. I'm sorry, but it must be done."

 

Sutekh looked at the Toa Terra, then at the Toa Septiu. Then he made sure to take in all his friends and fellow villagers outside before stating his decision. Losing them, he knew, would be far more devastating than losing Tekhtekh. The ill-tempered stick he could replace. His cherished companions, he could not.

 

"Then we'd better get started," Sutekh said, his eyes glittering with steely resolve.

 

"Agreed," Atemu said. "Come, my friends. We have much to do and very little time to do it."

 

------

 

Upon first observing the strange war implement landing at their feet, the Sebau and Samiu weren't quite sure what to make of it. But then the staff had made mental contact with them, and it was able to enlighten them. With its forceful persuasion and harsh rhetoric, Tekhtekh quickly convinced the Betshu that it meant them no harm — and that it needed to see their master and mistress with an important proposition to make, as soon as possible. Once that barrier had been breached, the Betshu had quickly scrambled to move it, as the distraught Sutekh watched from the nearby cliff top.

 

It had taken three Sebau all their strength to lift Tekhtekh, but once they did the horde was easily able to take it back to their underground fortress. There a disorganized swarm of troglodytes had already assembled, furious at the simultaneous loss of their Matoran captives and the fall of Tai-Koro to the enemy insurgents. One of the four present Nak, the commander known as Shmau, saw the returning party of soldiers carrying a bizarre-looking object with a glowing red orb in the center of its three spires, and moved to intercept them.

 

"Halt!" The Nak held out is clawed hand in front of the lead Samiu. "What are you up to? Where did you get that, and what in Makuta Rekhit's name is it?"

 

The Samiu folded its lanky arms proudly, standing on tiptoe to get as close to the Nak's height as it could. "We find this weapon in Cliffs of Manu. We takin' it to Apep. It says it has opposition to deliver to the King. It belong to orange and yellow Toa no more, and say it know critical information."

 

That's a proposition, you dolt! Tekhtekh hissed at the Samiu. Just get me to someone with at least half a brain, fast!

 

Shmau considered this for a moment. If what the rank-and-file grunt was saying was true, such a find could very well bring in a much-desired promotion for him. Such an opportunity was too good to pass up for the ambitious Nak. Sneering munificently, he moved to the side and pointed in the direction of the throne room. "Very well. Follow me."

 

Shmau led the gaggle of troglodytes and their prize through a couple of labyrinthine corridors, en route to where the King and Queen resided. They passed several guards on their shifts, but these Betshu did not gawk for long. Dim-witted as they were, they figured that any new discovery that a Nak would be overseeing had to be important. Eventually, the group reached the vast central chamber. Apep and Aso, still in their diminutive guises, lounged in their thrones while squabbling over who had been at fault for the loss of the captured village. Three other Nak, —  Bu, Hiq, and Shi — stood at attention off to the side and offered their analysis of the situation.

 

Bowing expansively, Shmau greeted his King and Queen. "Salutations, your most esteemed Majesties. I return bringing a squad of Sebau and Samiu who went in pursuit of the escaping warren of Matoran who fled from the Cliffs of Manu. They appear to have found a strange sentient implement that belonged to one of the Toa Septiu. It wants to speak with you."

 

Interested, Apep sat upright in his chair and peered down at the group. "It wants to speak with me?"

 

Naturally, Tekhtekh said, as the Sebau dumped it at the Atukam's feet. The staff swiveled itself upright, so that the crimson jewel eye could observe the long-awaited forms of Apep and Aso. I am Tekhtekh, the Cursed Wand of Chaos. Once, I belonged to the Toa Sutekh, but not any longer. I come to you humbly to offer my salutations . . . and my service.

 

"A talking staff! How genuinely interesting," Aso mused. "And I thought that Krana were the only organic objects to date."

 

"Why exactly would you want to help me, you who defected from the Toa?" Apep asked apprehensively.

 

I desire great power and dominion over living things, which you possess. You desire an artifact, currently in the hands of the Sisterhood of Het-hert, which will give you unlimited control over this island and the entire dome, the knowledge of which I possess. Each of us has something the other wants. Perhaps we can make a deal?

 

At the very mention of the relic, Apep and Aso sat bolt upright. They looked at Tekhtekh, then turned to each other. The royal pair's faces filled with hunger and eager anticipation.

 

The King of the Betshu could barely conceal the excitement in his grating voice. "You say you know where the object lies? You can lead us to it?"

 

Indubitably, Tekhtekh replied. Just wield me as your weapon, and each of us will receive what they want most. A one-way ticket to total domination for you, and a mighty master to be wielded by, for me. It's a win-win situation for everyone. Now, do we have a mutual understanding?

 

Apep and Aso didn't even have to reach an agreement. The two jumped down from their thrones, and Apep picked up Tekhtekh hurriedly. Peering deep into its vermillion orb, he issued his decision with an air of arrogant, gleeful satisfaction. "We have a deal."

 

Very good. Though it possessed no face, Tekhtekh almost looked as though it was grinning as broadly as Apep was.

 

Aso snapped her fingers, calling the four Nak to attention. "Shmau! Bu! Hiq! Shi! Call together all of your Nak brethren from all corners of the island. I want them assembled here along with the rest of our army."

 

Apep, on the other hand, was already at work. Concentrating his power, he issued a telepathic summons to every corner of the underground bastion, bidding each and every Betshu congregated there to assemble before him. Within a few seconds, the throne room reverberated with a quaking rumble as wave after wave of troglodytes arrived. It was only a matter of minutes before the whole horde had congregated, numbering thousands strong.

 

With titanic strength, Apep held Tekhtekh up triumphantly, his voice booming out over his evil armada. "My children! Forget the fact that the Matoran escaped! Forget the fact that they have retaken the village! Forget the fact that they have new allies on their side! None of that matters now."

 

"At last, after all these thousands of years, the Queen and I finally possess the key to our ultimate victory! We will lead you into battle against those puny followers of Mata Nui, and strike swiftly and mercilessly! None will be left alive afterward! Then, with nobody left to oppose us, this dome will fall, and once more the Betshu will rule these lands!"

 

Upon hearing his exclamation, the Sebau, Samiu, and Nak burst forth into thunderous roars of support, cheering the names of their leaders. "All hail Apep and Aso! Long live the Atukam!"

 

The King of the Betshu gripped his mate jubilantly. Together, after millennia of patiently waiting, the two of them would take their revenge on the Toa Sah, and slaughter all of the Matoran who had dared defy their wrath and escape. Tai-Koro would be left in ruins, as testament to the majesty of the Betshu. Their goals were clear; they did not even need to say anything to each other. Instead, they issued forth their last malevolent proclamation together.

 

"Kemet Nui shall be ours!"

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 21

 

In Terra-Koro, the Matoran had been busy for quite some time. A few days ago, the Sharaku and the Green One had decided that they would try to find the secret, hidden lair of the Visorak Queen Gorgorak, in an attempt to communicate with their old allies and re-establish relations with them in the event of a possible Quntaino attack. As a result, the Matoran of Terra Nui had formed a temporary coalition to oversee matters in the village — and they were taking no chances.

 

Machi, on Ikki as always, had immediately sent word to the Aquavak to assemble their army at the Matoran village as soon as possible. Wula and Zumi, thanks to a tip on the fastest mining tunnel route given to them by Kofu and Vakk, had sought out the Necrovak and delivered a similar message to the desert Bohrok. Finally, Pyar, Sari, and Takan had journeyed to the barren lava plains of Mount Juvala to find the nomadic Acko clans, their longtime allies, and bring them to Terra-Koro. The clan chieftain Hssirssih had marshaled all his troops only once prior, when Terra Nui was under the threat of the Dark Lord's evil Sharaku. Nevertheless, the leathery old lizard was more than willing to bring his hundreds of battle-ready fighters to the Matoran’s home.

 

Unlike the Battle of Terra Nui forty years earlier, when the Matoran had unexpectedly been joined by Aquavak midway through the fight for the village, this current campaign had rallied all of Terra-Koro's defenders together at once before any fighting might occur. As a result, Terra-Koro's avenues were crowded with Acko and Bohrok, while the Matoran coalition leaders drilled their troops in the streets impatiently. The atmosphere was tense, but everyone was positive that Visorak reinforcements would soon arrive, headed by the Sharaku and the Green One.

 

This made it all the more surprising when the rushing Bladetort scampered into the village as fast as its razor-edged legs could carry it.

 

Machi, Sari, and Jeiku were all playing a game of Akilini on the peaceful terrace beneath the water-spouting Hakeahu fountain when they were suddenly interrupted by a loud rumbling coming from the southwest. The source of this racket was shortly revealed when the Green One's titanic tortoise thundered into view, decelerating to its usual lumbering gait to allow the Green One, Kavan, Vukaz, and Thukor to disembark. Hanak, Zanta, and Rieka appeared behind it a few moments later.

 

"What happened?" Machi inquired, as Hanak approached him and his patiently-hovering Icorak. "Did you manage to encounter the Visorak?"

 

Hanak remained stone-faced as he looked down at Machi, betraying only an expression of urgency. "Get everyone around the fountain, now. We come bearing grave news."

 

Silently and as quickly as possible, the Matoran went throughout Terra-Koro calling all parties to assemble around the center of the village. Once this was accomplished, the Sharaku and the Green One climbed up onto the raised platform around the monument. Hanak cleared his throat as the crowd's mumbling died down, and then commandingly raised his voice to be heard throughout the village.

 

"I would like to thank you, my Matoran friends, for your wise insight in bringing our warrior allies here. That proves to be very timely, for we will need every soldier we can get. The Quntaino are coming here."

 

Immediately the crowds of villagers and Rahi erupted into stentorian disbelief. Hssirssih, with Pyar at his side, hobbled over to the Sharaku and waved his branch staff at the six heroes. "Are you certain of this?"

 

"We saw it for ourselves," Zanta said. "The Visorak did not treat us with hospitable generosity, but savagely attacked us. Gorgorak proved uncooperative, and acknowledged us as evil. They said that we were just as evil as the Dark Lord's minions, and seemed to have forgotten that we were ever on their side!"

 

"And den da Quntaino appeared!" the Green One exclaimed. "Dey's da ones who turned da Visorak against us. Dey were controlling them, and fought us too!"

 

"Thankfully, we escaped with no injuries, thanks to the Bladetort's timely arrival," Hanak admitted. "But I have no doubt that the Quntaino have summoned all of the spiders and are marching here at this very moment. We must defend the village to prevent them from taking over Terra Nui. Otherwise, if we fall to the Quntaino, they will be able to search for and find the Kanohi Zlinj unimpaired, wherever it may be on the island."

 

"The Zlinj?" an Aquavak Va asked. "I thought the Zlinj was lost forty years ago!"

 

"It was," Kavan replied. "At least, the Mask of Nature collapsed into the sea along with the coastal shelf. We could never find it ourselves, but it's probably lying somewhere on the seabed now, and may have been responsible for the creation of the Sharakoro Islets from the battlefield debris that was once the coastal shelf. But the mask's whereabouts don't matter; if the Quntaino control Terra Nui, they will find it eventually."

 

"So we must protect the village at all costs," Hanak added. "I'm not sure exactly what might happen to us were we to be taken prisoner by the Quntaino, but it likely wouldn't be very pleasant, that's for sure."

 

"But even if your home communities remain unconquered, the Quntaino will almost certainly seek you out and bend you to their control!" Rieka cried. "If the Quntaino take Terra-Koro and the other population centers, then they will be able to find the Kanohi Zlinj, and we'll all be doomed!"

 

"That must never happen," Thukor said solemnly. "All of us can prevent this tragedy by defending the village before the Quntaino can storm it."

 

The Necrovak, Aquavak, and Matoran looked at each other in the great crowd. They knew as well as the Sharaku that losing the Zlinj would mean an end to Terra-Koro and possibly a lifetime of enslavement under the ferocious keystone-born; that couldn't possibly be allowed to take place.

 

"Are you with us?" Vukaz asked. "We need everyone's support in order to protect the village and all we hold dear!"

 

The reply was immediate and universal. "For Mata Nui's sake and for the sake of Terra Nui, we will fight with you!" Hssirssih shouted. "Doom to the Matoran means doom to the Acko! The clans will never submit to an empire ruled by the Quntaino! We will fight, or die trying!"

 

"Count us in, too!" the Necrovak and Aquavak buzzed. "The very thought of having to surrender to those monsters makes our Krana tingle. It will be just like old times, forty years ago!"

 

"Sounds good," Hanak said enthusiastically. "What do you think, Green One?"

 

But the Green One had silently paused, despite the general hubbub. His eyes closed, the diminutive being listened to the wind and all the sounds of the environment with utmost concentration. Being completely attuned to the natural world, he could detect things that no other individual could.

 

Suddenly, his eyes snapped open. Gripping his axe with a clenched fist, he pointed a trembling finger in the direction of the forest and uttered a single sentence filled with despair and dread. The Green One was almost never afraid, but he was now, and that was always a bad sign.

 

"Dey's coming right now."

 

Merely seconds after hearing this declaration, the Sharaku, Matoran, and Rahi became aware of an eerie hum emanating from the distance. It was not a low, sharp sound of thousands of feet marching in lockstep, as it had been when the Drone army was advancing on Terra-Koro. Instead, it was a hurried frenzy of locomotion, as if many multitudes of beings were all running together at different times and paces. Kofu and the other herders sucked their breath in shock. They had heard as eerie and terrifying sound as this before, something that instilled terror in Matoran's hearts just as much as this did — a Muudabok stampede. And they were pretty sure who was spearheading this charge.

 

Scrambling madly, the army of defenders rushed to the outskirts of Terra-Koro. There, a strange and frightening spectacle awaited them. From the edges of the immense Johmai Jungle, an army was emerging. But this was no ordinary army.

 

Hanak had been right. The Quntaino had indeed brought reinforcements.

 

Driven mad with a thirst for battle by the sheer will of their indomitable masters' mental presence, a horde of Rahi slowly made its way toward Terra-Koro. Almost every conceivable dangerous beast, every killer or carnivorous predator, made up this army. A full legion of Visorak was interspersed in the force, scuttling forward at maximum velocity with gnashing pincers. Some of these were carrying a makeshift wooden sedan chair on which Gorgorak lounged, which due to its slow progress was at the back of the convoy. The obese monarch was fully animated, however, screeching out orders to her progeny as they continued in their procession. Around the Visorak were clustered dozens of red Ariakudo spiders, each as big as a Toa. This was supplemented by three packs of Kompiki, each with a dozen or more raptors; three raving Rahanivika screeching at the top of their lungs and galloping onward with lengthy strides of their powerful legs; and a single roaring Thylacine. In the air a flock of Magraka flew haphazardly while issuing raucous cries, accompanied by a few snag-toothed Zykeral and one serpentine Ascipitero.

 

Though all of these Rahi came from all areas of the island and were normally too simple-minded to work together as a single unit, they were being ruthlessly controlled to create a highly effective, if rag-tag, army. The villagers were just thankful that the Quntaino hadn't persuaded any Xotohk to join their vile cause; the gigantic wasps were normally too reclusive and inaccessible to reach, and stayed inside their mountain hive stronghold most of the time, but their sheer might could have the potential to overwhelm the Matoran in minutes. Likewise, it was good that no Tyrannarahk had been corrupted by the Quntaino, as the alpha predators would maul, kill, and eat anything that stood in their way.

 

At the very front of the mass of Rahi, the six Quntaino ran full-speed toward the village, brandishing their weapons and shouting war-cries at their foes. But the worst sign of all lay not at the front of the horde, but in its center.

 

There a massive Ariakudo, over five bio tall and with the diameter of her legs wider than a Matoran house, slowly plodded, surrounded by its myriad children. This was the mother of all the spiders, even bigger than Gorgorak herself, in age surpassing most Matoran's life spans and completely blind from being so ancient. Unable to see, and not relying on her other senses, she moved forward only under the domination of the being who stood triumphantly on top of her thorax — and this was what scared the Sharaku most. For they knew now what had become of the silver Suva upon which the six keystones had rested. It had birthed a seventh, final, ultimate Quntaino.

 

This being stood taller than any of his minions and was mammalian in appearance. His muscular, armor-clad body was covered in a cloak of rippling silver fur that waved behind him in a mane due to the strong airstream. Like an Ash Bear, he possessed huge claws on his pawed hands and feet, the latter of which gripped the mother Ariakudo's carapace tightly. His broad head had four jaws bristling with dagger-like teeth that were bared in a feral snarl; and his emotionless, ruby, crystalline eyes looked upon all that he observed with cold command. Needing no rope harness to guide the Ariakudo, he cracked a long, tentacle-like whip in the air with one hand while raising the other, its connected forearm bearing a menacing clawed weapon, in a gesture of ominous authority. And as he did so, he let loose a roar that echoed in the ears of the Matoran, Sharaku, Acko, Bohrok, and all who opposed him.

 

"You do not know who I am, Sharaku! But I know very well indeed who you are! I am Argentaros, alpha Quntaino, master of the Ariakudo, leader of the Visorak swarms, and the soon-to-be ruler of all Terra Nui! The time has come for a new age on this island, one that I will shape as I see fit! Tremble in fear; for none can stand in my way!"

 

"Your epoch of carelessly administering Terra Nui is over! The days of the Matoran are coming to a close! The era of the Quntaino is nigh! The time of reckoning is at hand!"

 

"From this day forward, the Kanohi Zlinj, the Great Mask of Nature, will belong to me!"

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 22

 

That very same morning, in another heavily-defended and vital enclave in the center of Terra Nui's adjacent dome, the inhabitants of Kemet Nui continued to prepare for the fight of their lives against the Betshu.

 

The three Turaga Sah had been inside the Kemet Nui elder's house, which they had not moved from since the previous day. All were armed. Atemu carried his Superthermal Sickle, the tip of which he had heated in Tukua's old forge until it glowed a furious orange and which was crackling with plasma. Akito held his lit torch staff and carried his antique crossbow, which had not left his side since he had landed on Kemet Nui. And Pelekua gripped his somewhat-bent tri-pronged stave, which he had sharpened on Atemu's mask-making anvil just for good measure. Together, the trio of elders stood facing Atemu's lit fireplace, their weathered faces turned upward at the mantelpiece, upon which rested the Turaga of Plasma's collection of Amaja Circle stones that represented the Toa Sah, as well as the traditional stone that represented the Great Spirit.

 

"Mata Nui, you alone shall decide the outcome of our struggle," Atemu said reverently, gazing up at his collection. "So it was our destiny to emerge from Metru Nui and come here to liberate a secret sect and an enslaved people. And so it will now be our providence to see Apep and Aso vanquished once and for all . . . or our fate to watch our civilization fall to the darkness forever."

 

"Yes, but let us hope that the odds are in our favor," Pelekua added sardonically. "I know that the Great Spirit doesn't often take sides, or at least I don't think he does, but against the minions of an Atukam he just might."

 

Akito, meanwhile, put his weathered hands on the respective shoulders of each of his two friends and looked at them with an expression of contentment. "Well, whatever happens, at least we know we will have made a difference to this world. Our lives have been long, rich, and happy. Finding the two of you still alive after all these years has been worthwhile, to say the least. It's been a pleasure knowing you."

 

"That it has," Atemu replied. He, Akito, and Pelekua all shook hands reverently, then the three of them pounded fists one last time in the Toa style. "May we all meet along with the rest of our team on the other side."

 

"To the Toa Sah!" Pelekua cheered, and then the three Turaga all raised their staffs in one final salute.

 

------

 

Elsewhere in Tai-Koro, the six Toa Septiu, eight Toa Terra, Sisterhood of Het-hert members, and a sizeable contingent of Matoran all were assembled in front of the Great Philae Temple. The warriors knew that under the guidance of Tekhtekh, the sacred building would be the first place targeted by the Betshu in their relentless pursuit of the artifact. And so the bulk of the village's defenders, around five hundred of them, clustered around this holy place to prevent any rebellious fiends from entering.

 

Chompshi and Vrael stood at the head of the line of Toa Terra, next to Ausar, who headed his own Toa team. "Do you remember that last move we went over last night?" the Toa of Electricity whispered quietly at his buddy.

 

"Yeah," Vrael replied.

 

"Good. We're going to need it to wrap things up here if they get out of hand."

 

Sutekh, on the other hand, was located right next to Anpu in the Septiu assembly. The Toa of Storms carried only his laser gauntlet on his left hand, his right one feeling strangely empty without Tekhtekh. The Toa of Magnetism, seeing this loss, was trying to offer him support.

 

"Don't feel bad about having only one weapon, Sutekh," Anpu consoled. "I myself carry no weapons, using only elemental powers and martial art techniques, and it's never let me down. Why, your powers are even better at attacking than mine! There's nothing to worry about!"

 

"It's not that I'm worried about," Sutekh told him glumly. "It's the knowledge that I unwittingly betrayed Kemet Nui."

 

At this remark, Auset turned to Sutekh and gave him a bright expression of understanding. "Truly, the fault was not yours," she reassured gently. "Tekhtekh was the one to blame. And we will figure out a way to deal with that staff after the battle is completed."

 

"Chompshi still thinks it should be destroyed," Ausar remarked, "but the choice is yours as to whatever happens to Tekhtekh. Give it some time to think about once we've wrenched it free from Apep's grip."

 

Meanwhile, on the ramparts of Tai-Koro, Sekhet, Meti, Shna, and the remaining fifty Matoran had volunteered as guards to scout out the first waves of a possible Betshu invasion force. The Av-Matoran, however, could see nothing on the horizon despite the fact that they were using high-magnification telescopes and binoculars. The Vatuka likewise was roaming outside the perimeter of the village, though Atemu knew it might be tricky to get the massive stone Rahi inside once the Betshu attacked. Still, it could provide some much-needed time to worry the troglodytes before the Matoran could retaliate on their own.

 

"Anything yet?" Bast shouted at her fellow Sister, from where she was sitting on top of a restless Wild Fang Tooth. "We're getting antsy down here, just waiting for something to happen! Pretty much!"

 

"No, there appears to be nothing," Sekhet affirmed, lowering the binoculars clenched in her claws. "Meti and Shna have told me that they've checked every possible direction and angle that Apep and Aso might be moving in from. They verified that no warships are coming up the Hapi River, nothing is emerging from the scrub forest, and no response has yet been sighted from the sand dunes. In short, all's been uneventful. If we had seen anything, we would have told you by now."

 

"I don't like this," Ausar said, seeing the three Turaga emerge from Atemu's house and briskly pace over to where the Toa were. "It's too quiet. They're planning something."

 

"Yes, but what exactly?" Akito asked, scratching his head. "The three of us Turaga have looked over every possible angle, every move from historical battles on Kemet Nui that we could, and we simply cannot foresee anything new that the Scourges might try. In fact, the only remaining possible explanation — and it seems an equally outlandish one at that — is that the Betshu could be trying to attack from . . ."

 

He was cut off by a sudden and inexorable tremor in the earth below Tai-Koro, which began to shake uncontrollably behind the startled Matoran's feet. In an instant, Akito's suspicions were confirmed, and one did not need to be a Toa of Earth or Stone to figure out what their enemies had masterminded this time.

 

"Underground! They're attacking from below!" Akito yelled.

 

"Everyone away from the center of the village!" Atemu shouted, marshalling Tai-Koro's defenders down from the ramparts and toward the Great Philae Temple. "They are using our very own tunnels against us!"

 

As the earthquake, or rather the sound of thousands of pounding troglodyte feet, increased in intensity, the Matoran still couldn't see any of their dastardly foes appearing yet. The sinkholes created by Heru's task force when they had drilled their way into Tai-Koro had been covered up and filled in after the battle, when the walls were fixed and the huge gates reconnected to their hinges. But the Betshu's positions were soon confirmed: through the sand, their howls and screams intensified as they discovered the Xcavator and Stryda that the Toa Septiu had parked just below the entrance into the village. Heru and Nebt-het's hearts sank as they listened to the wrenching of metal and Protodermis and the smashing of cockpit crystal as the digging machine and its six-legged counterpart were torn apart and demolished.

 

"The vehicles!" Heru shouted, unable to take it any more. "They've destroyed the vehicles!"

 

"Forget that, we have bigger problems to worry about!" Ausar insisted. The commotion was soon followed and drowned out by a muffled explosion as the Xcavator and Stryda's fuel cells exploded, unable to take the repeated pounding of weapons. A plume of sand and shards of metal shot upward through the tunnel, accompanied by a cloud of acrid smoke. Once this had cleared, however, a gaping hole had appeared in the center of Tai-Koro; and it wasn't empty for long, as the first waves of Sebau and Samiu began clambering out and into the village. Though the blast had claimed several lives, the minions of the Atukam weren't really bothered, and continued to stream past both the dead bodies and the useless hunks of junk that had once been the vehicles.

 

"There they are! Attack!" Chompshi shouted, raising his fully-charged lightning staff high as the Matoran surged forward to meet the oncoming horde. Though many of the defenders had been on the fortifications before the Betshu attacked, they now hurried into the village square to confront the slavering troglodytes. From outside the Tai-Koro walls, the Vatuka roared in vain, but it simply could not enter the village. For once, the Matoran would have to fight without it. And despite the villagers' best efforts to push them back and contain them, more and more Sebau and Samiu appeared. In only a few minutes, the truly staggering implications of their numbers dawned on the Turaga.

 

"There's too many of them!" Pelekua hollered at Atemu and Akito, staying back behind the wall of Toa who were firing elemental blasts and Kanohi powers at the Betshu. "They outnumber us almost ten to one! Apep and Aso must be pouring everything they've got at us!"

 

"Whatever their numbers are, remain calm," Atemu insisted. "We've faced odds worse than this before, haven't we, Akito?"

 

"Oh yes, on multiple occasions," the Turaga of Magma replied, picking off a Samiu with a shot from his laser crossbow from between Vrael's legs. "Can anyone see their battle leaders?"

 

"I can!" Auset cried. "Over there!"

 

To the surprise of every Matoran fighting for his or her life, the Betshu paused momentarily. Now that all three thousand of them had clambered into the village, the swarm of minions stopped and stood silently as twelve heinously-grinning Nak popped out of the sinkhole. Each one swung their meteor hammer and thrashed their wings madly as they sneered down at their Toa foes.

 

"Twelve Nak?" Ausar said. "That's got to be as many as they have!" He turned to the advanced Betshu and leveled his Kepesh at them. "You don't scare us, you flying freaks! I could beat you with one arm!"

 

"I just may take you up on that offer, Toa!" Shmau cackled. "However, my team and I are not here to force you to surrender. We are here to tell you that you are doomed — because our superiors are here to prove this so!"

 

For a moment, this did not sink in. Suddenly, though, a horrible rumble of laughter began echoing through the village, issuing from the very same spot where the Nak and their forces had arisen. Appearing to be a single ululating sound at first, it quickly separated into that of two maniacal individuals, one deep and resonant, the other harsh and strident.

 

The Toa and Turaga's blood ran cold. Matoran who had been confident in their ability to beat a bunch of Betshu now quaked in sheer fear. After thousands of years of hiding, of orchestrating the Kemet Nui invasions from right beneath the elders' very noses, the Toa Sah's greatest nemesis and his evil consort that had once been their ally were about to reveal themselves.

 

"You think you can defeat us? Oh, I can assure you that will never, never happen, you pathetic and misguided little scum," Apep chided. "Everything that has come to pass is about to change."

 

"Say goodbye to the light, you fools," Aso hissed, "because it's the last time you'll ever see it."

 

"You dared think that you could possibly encapsulate me for eternity? Hah!" Apep continued. "I have freed myself from your imprisonment! Your victory is your defeat! Your triumph is your coffin! I have faked my own demise, and from the mists I am reborn!"

 

Atemu began to shiver. "Oh no. Not now. We cannot defeat him like this. We simply can't!"

 

Akito peered at his friend sadly through his Kanohi's telescopic eyepiece. "We must. There is no other way."

 

As the Matoran looked on in pure dread and the Sebau and Samiu forces watched eagerly, the King and Queen of the Betshu hovered into view, ascending from the underground tunnel like a prehistoric monster erupting from a seething volcano. But this time, they were fully prepared for battle . . . and frightening to behold.

 

Both Apep and Aso had transformed from weak and frail elder forms into towering and awe-inspiring harbingers of darkness. Each one stood one and a half times as tall as a Toa and emanated power and intense evil. Aso's striking emerald and ebony armor shone on her slim but powerful body, while four katana spines projected from her back. She had a very long, serpentine tail that curved and twisted beneath her like a tornado, and her talon-tipped fingers were clenched ferociously. Behind her Kanohi she possessed a broad hood, while the face beneath her rune-painted and fanged Avsa formed a nightmarish expression. The orange heartlight visible through her silver ribcage armor pulsed violently, as if it could already feel the battle beginning.

 

Next to her stood her mate, looking as though he hadn't suffered one bit since the day of his being sealed by the Toa Sah. Apep's hulking figure was covered in blood-red and pitch-black armor, accompanied by jagged spikes, four immense bat-like wings that sliced through the air, a scaly blade-tipped tail, and like his mate, curved, serrated talons on his hands and massive feet. His draconic Jutlin was twisted into an expression of hatred and baleful triumph, while his red eyes gleamed insanely. Both of Apep's palms crackled with blue electric energy — he could fire seismic energy surges from them — but worst of all, in his upraised right hand he clenched Tekhtekh tightly. Seemingly as madly gleeful as its new master, the sentient staff regarded the Toa and Turaga gloatingly.

 

Your secret is out, Matoran. The game is up. I win!

 

"Why, it's Turaga Sah Atemu, Akito, and Pelekua!" Apep taunted. "My, how small and pathetic you now look! Face it, your glory days of being able to stand up to me are long over! And the one who helped you back then was working alongside me all along!"

 

Being brought up, Aso cracked her knuckles as she envisioned killing all three Turaga. "Yes, and you are vastly outnumbered, again, even with fourteen Toa and a small army of Matoran. I'm going to enjoy this very, very much!"

 

"This ends here, Apep!" Atemu shouted, speaking for all the Matoran and Toa. "Do your worst!"

 

"As you wish," the King of the Betshu replied. He motioned to Shmau and the other Nak, then pointed one curved talon straight at the defenders of Tai-Koro. "Destroy them."

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 23

 

Upon hearing Argentaros's dire proclamation, the Sharaku, Matoran, and all the other defenders of Terra-Koro were surprised and also quite alarmed. The alpha Quntaino had spoken to them not in some Rahi language, even an advanced language such as Visorak, but in a highly advanced tongue: Matoran. To the Sharaku, this had to be bad, for either the Quntaino were evolving at an unprecedented rate, which made them all the more dangerous, or somehow they were learning the Matoran's secrets — and possibly even their weaknesses.

 

Whatever the case, the leader of their enemy spoke very eloquently for giving such a warning as he had. The six subordinate Quntaino, it seemed, were also shouting out battle cries in Matoran, though their version of the language was much coarser than Argentaros's. Indeed, they spoke mostly in a basic, grammatically-poor version, one that that bespoke their lesser intellects compared to their leader. Nevertheless, since all seven of the Quntaino could understand Matoran perfectly, no matter how they spoke it, Hanak yelled out a challenge at the approaching horde as he, his team, and the Matoran and Rahi army stood their ground and prepared for the assault.

 

"Argentaros? You're the one behind all this?"

 

"Obviously!" the Quntaino roared. "If you will not give us the Mask we shall have to take it by force!"

 

"Over our dead bodies!" the Sharaku replied. "Never will we give the Kanohi Zlinj up to you! We won't even allow you to take it for yourselves!"

 

"I was afraid of this," Argentaros mused. Though his ruby eyes remained emotionless, any sadness in his voice was false, instead dripping with sarcasm. "Foolish Sharaku. You and your allies shall regret standing in our way. Prepare to suffer the consequences!"

 

Hanak's team and the Green One didn't even say a few words to inspire courage among each other and their friends. By now, the Rahi were closing in too fast. Just as Argentaros had finished speaking, the wave of crazed beasts entered the village outskirts where the Sharaku, Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko waited. Immediately, the Sharaku's army began what it had been instructed to do: prevent the wild Rahi from entering the center of the village. Undoubtedly some parts of Terra-Koro would be heavily damaged in the siege, but if the center of the village — including the Sharaku's houses and Akito's home — fell to the Quntaino, then the whole municipality would be conquered.

 

Hanak rushed forward at maximum acceleration, both swords out and enveloped in flames. He slammed into Daigolva, causing the hulking red Quntaino to totter backward; but Daigolva reacted faster than Hanak expected, planting one armored foot into the ground while stepping forward and unsheathing his broadsword from the bandolier across his chest. Growling, Daigolva aimed a spiral slash at the Sharaku of Fire, but Hanak met this blow with a parry of his own weapons.

 

"This will be the last time we shall duel, Sharaku!" Daigolva bellowed. "I guarantee that after the Rahi have conquered this village and all other townships on Terra Nui, you will serve in a valuable position under me! If you are lucky, I shall amuse myself with watching your antics while you are trussed in chains. If not, I shall whet my weapon on your armor!"

 

"Indeed it is the last time, Daigolva," Hanak countered, "but it is you and not I who will emerge as the fool. Your blind rage in this hopeless ambition of yours has not made you smart. It has made you capable of being defeated. Fight fire with fire, I say, and my fire is stronger!"

 

"That remains debatable," said Daigolva, and he continued his furious onslaught.

 

While this was taking place, the other Sharaku had teamed up into various groups to take on the equal amount of Quntaino opposing them. Zanta had simultaneously engaged both Predacron and Snimurai, and was teleporting back and forth to evade their attacks while hitting them with gusts of wind and axe slashes. This was aided by Vukaz, who set up force fields to protect himself and the Sharaku of Air whenever either of the two Quntaino tried to stab them. Thukor, in contrast, was fighting Carcarinax again, but he also had another task at hand. Though he, aside from the other Sharaku, was the only being in the village capable of taking on the ichthyoidal Quntaino, he had to keep an eye out for anyone who required emergency battlefield healing. This would limit the amount of combat he could participate in slightly, but so far there had been no problems, thankfully.

 

Rieka and Kavan, in the age-old fashion of warriors of Earth and Stone battling together, were surrounded by Nosfernox and Icrizahk. To compensate, they were trying a new and unique strategy. The Sharaku of Earth would tunnel underground and hit the Quntaino with trident stabs, while Kavan would take earth that she would fling at him and send it through a portal at either Nosfernox or Icrizahk. At the moment the approach was working, because whenever one of the brutish Quntaino protected himself from the flying soil, they would have to think fast to avoid a hit from Rieka's tridents or Kavan's pincers.

 

What was truly remarkable, however, was the bravery with which the Matoran, Acko, and Bohrok were holding their own against the horde of possessed Rahi. This matchup had been practically dictated from the beginning. If the Rahi had fought the Sharaku, then the six warriors would have overwhelmed the Terra Nui creatures with relatively little effort. Similarly, had the Quntaino challenged the Matoran and the other sentient tribes, they would have proven so powerful that they might have wounded or even killed some of the soldiers, which in the Quntaino’s mind was not an option. This was a mission of conquest: violent, to be sure, but with the intention of forcing the enemy to surrender without killing any of their forces. There was more than one way to skin a Feraline, as far as Argentaros was concerned.

 

But at any rate, the Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko were doing remarkably against the Rahi. Years of training since the Battle of Terra Nui had done them well. The Green One, leading the struggle as always, was sitting atop his Bladetort as the titanic tortoise did battle with an enemy it would normally never encounter in the wild — the Thylacine. Similar to the saber-toothed cat in size and strength, the valiant Green One immediately engaged with the Bladetort to prevent it from mauling a cadre of Acko. The Thylacine abandoned its attempts to maim the Acko and was now trying to slash at the Bladetort with claw swipes from its immense paws or bite it with its dagger-like fangs and canines. The Bladetort would always retreat into its shell temporarily to deflect these hits, but it did have to be wary of the Thylacine's lashing tail or an occasional body slam; but the two large Rahi in general were evenly matched.

 

Other Rahi were running amuck. Kofu, Vakk, and a group of Onu-Matoran miners and Ga-Matoran fishers had cornered the packs of Kompiki and were worrying the raptors with their digging tools and spearing implements. Though the Onu-Matoran were clad in heavy Matoran blast armor that rendered them ploddingly slow, no Kompiki bite or talon poke could get through these defenses; the Ga-Matoran compensated for this by throwing nets on the Kompiki. Elsewhere, Jeiku, Hukiro, and some Le-Matoran were trying to lasso the trio of Rahanivika and bring the predatory avians to their knees. This gave mixed results, as the enraged terror birds would lash out randomly with their massive beaks or try to stomp on their Matoran assailants with their powerful feathered feet. Still, one of the Rahanivika was brought down after some time, and the others were wearing out.

 

The Bohrok and Acko, on the other hand, were concentrating on the swarming Visorak and juvenile Ariakudo. Whereas the sentient spider Rahi had been their erstwhile allies during the Battle of Terra Nui, the Necrovak and Aquavak and their Va found no problems in defending against the marauding Visorak in the current situation. The Visorak were fast, but were simply incapable of outrunning a balled-up Bohrok, and Hordika Venom would be useless anyway, so they merely resorted to pincer gnashing while the Bohrok and Va bombarded them with energy blasts. Similarly, the Acko were attacking the large red Ariakudo with their tribal bone weapons. Hssirssih and a group of his bravest chiefs and clan warriors had even taking up the daunting task of removing their age-old enemies, the Magraka. The flock of wyverns had immediately targeted their natural prey once the fight had commenced, and the Acko responded accordingly with spear stabs or waving their flaming shields or torches in the air. Though they inhabited a volcanic lava land, Magraka did fear fire, and so they could be repelled, for the time being.

 

Gorgorak, though, was of lesser priority. Since she herself couldn't fight, being too fat to move around, the group of underlings supporting her sedan chair had plopped the construct down and left, leaving the Visorak Queen stranded on the edge of the village and capable of only shouting orders at the horde. Of course the Visorak still protectively surrounded her, as the death of their monarch would be a crippling moral defeat, but this helped her little as she still was practically useless.

 

Cringing as a tooth-baring Acko clinging onto an Ariakudo for dear life shot passed her, Gorgorak waved her pudgy forelimbs in the air in the general direction of the Visorak. "You imbeciles, this fight is getting too close for comfort! I need some protection! Save me, save me! Hurt them, hurt them!"

 

The nearest Quntaino, Predacron, looked away from fighting Vukaz and shrieked at Gorgorak without paying much attention. "Save them, save them, hurt you, hurt you, got it!"

 

"What!? You swimming windbag, come back here!" But the blue Quntaino was gone, resuming his duel alongside Snimurai.

 

Out of all the combatants defending Terra-Koro from the Quntaino's wrath, however, perhaps none was quite so inspiring in his endeavor as Machi. Rivaling even the Green One in pure performance, the adventurous Ga-Matoran had jumped onto Ikki at the start of the battle and was now looping through the sky above the village at top speed. The crazed Zykeral had taken up pursuit of his mount as Icorak, if they could be caught, were prey to the black wyverns, and screeched at Machi in desperation as he evaded their aerial bites and attacks. Even the solitary Ascipitero had taken notice of this blue blur buzzing around in the sky and was chasing him too, which was a real challenge to Machi, as he had never before encountered one of the serpentine wyverns. The Ascipitero was faster than the Zykeral and would frequently spit poison at him, attempt to chomp down on Ikki's wings with its pointed fangs, or thrash its elongate emerald body, red-blotched wings, and spindly tail in his general direction. As dangerous as it was, this chase really spiked Heaka's brother's adrenaline. He hadn't had this much fun in ages.

 

"Take some of this, suckers!" Machi shouted, pulling a bunch of Madu Cabolo from his pouch and tossing them at the Zykeral, which created a deafening explosion that disoriented his pursuers and sent some crashing down to earth. "Hang on there, Ikki! We're gonna have us a rips-snorting fight!"

 

On the ground, though, two of the most instrumental Matoran were not to be seen fighting Rahi in the streets. One of Wula and Zumi's vendor carts had been overturned, and the two Po-Matoran inventor siblings had taken shelter beneath the wooden edifice and its piles of spilled goods.

 

"What's the plan, big sister?" Zumi asked timorously, as from behind the cart he watched two of the Onu-Matoran being dragged by the half-stunned Rahanivika.

 

"Well, I gave out all the items and weapons I could, so there's not much we can do," Wula said. "I suppose we could go join the other Po-Matoran, but our position is surrounded by enemy ranks at the moment, so we might as well stay put."

 

A Madu Cabolo explosion rocked through the air, while a blast of flaming breath from one of the Zkyeral attacking the Acko set a nearby house's roof on fire. Wincing at the sound, Wula and Zumi had barely peeked outside before a new Matoran paid them a visit. It was young Pyar, who managed to squeeze through the fallen commodities to just barely avoid a Visorak pincer gnash, shortly before the spider Rahi was tackled by a Necrovak.

 

"Pyar! Good to see you again!" Zumi said. He liked the Acko translator, as the two were approximately the same age.

 

"Any news from the front lines?" Wula enquired earnestly.

 

"It's absolute chaos out there!" the small Ta-Matoran exclaimed. "I was just returning from delivering a message from Hssirssih to Takan and Sari when I saw what damage the big Mama Ariakudo is doing! Our forces are being crushed! All the Ta-Matoran, Po-Matoran, and Ko-Matoran can't stop it, and that evil silver Quntaino riding it is only furthering its advance! We have to do something!"

 

"You're right," agreed Wula. "Come on, we have to get this information to the Sharaku. They're probably too busy fighting the Quntaino to see the situation, and since Argentaros can communicate telepathically with his six underlings then they would know about the advance without informing the Sharaku! Now is not the time to hide. Let's move."

 

With that, the three Matoran backed out from behind the cart and ran toward the side streets where the Sharaku were as fast as they could, dodging any Rahi that came in their path. They only hoped they could make it in time.

 

------

Hanak knew that things were getting worse. The battle had already been raging for quite some time, and as the sun rose in the sky the Rahi continued their indomitable if random advance. He could already see that the various skirmishes were being pushed farther into the village than they had been when the fighting had commenced, and at this rate the Quntaino would get past the avenues and houses and reach the center of Terra-Koro. Once they reached the Hakeahu statue, then the keystone-born's primary objective would be reached — and the Sharaku, Matoran, and all their allies would be forced to surrender.

 

Obviously, that couldn't be allowed to happen. As Hanak continued to exchange blows with Daigolva, he yelled in the general direction of his five teammates. "They're still gaining ground! There has to be a way to stop them!"

 

"I don't know, maybe a change in tactics?" suggested Kavan. He had been temporarily grabbed by Icrizahk in an arm-lock, but had managed to escape using his pincers and some help from Rieka, and then threw his Quntaino assailant into a portal. "That might throw them off guard and force them to go from being on the offensive to being on the defensive."

 

Zanta, meanwhile, dodged an attack from Snimurai and motioned with his axes at Argentaros. "Wait a minute! Look over there!"

 

Hanak turned, and for the first time he truly understood how truly unstoppable the mother Ariakudo was. Despite almost all of the Ta, Po, and Ko-Matoran in the village trying to impede its movement, the colossal spider still plodded onward, past any nets or traps or attacking Matoran. To make matters worse, Argentaros was lashing out with his silver whip at any villager within reach, ensuring that his mount would continue on without trouble. At this rate nothing could stand in the way of them reaching the Terra-Koro square; it could take as little as half an hour.

 

And then he saw Wula run up on top of a collapsed hut. Accompanied by Zumi and Pyar, she had just barely managed to reach the Sharaku, and was jumping up and down urgently while pointing at the giant Ariakudo. "Hanak! Do something!" shouted the Po-Matoran inventor, barely heard over the din of the conflict.

 

The Sharaku leader looked at Wula, then he looked at his team struggling on. And then he knew what to do. He would provide them with much-needed time — in the form of a diversion.

 

"Cover me!" Hanak instructed Zanta. Then he lunged at Daigolva with a backhand slash of his blazing fire sword while leaping past the red Quntaino's thrust. Taken by surprise, Daigolva fell backward, and his momentum carried him right into the path of Snimurai's spherical locomotion. Unable to change his trajectory while balled-up, the green Quntaino crashed into his crimson comrade, and they both lay stunned for a minute in the dirt. That was all Hanak needed.

 

"Got it! Go, go, go!" Zanta replied. Hanak then spotted the Green One atop his Bladetort not too far away. The diminutive being had just succeeded in taking out the Thylacine, and the Bladetort had reared up in triumph over the unconscious cat. Using his rapid acceleration, Hanak bounded over the battlefield and clambered onto the large tortoise's back.

 

"I'll take the reins here! You go and help Zanta!" Hanak said.

 

"Are you sure dat dis is gonna work?" the Green One asked, confused as to what was going on.

 

"Yes, yes! Now move!" Nodding diligently, the Green One dismounted and ran to help Zanta while Hanak lashed the mount Rahi's guiding vines. Rumbling mightily, the Bladetort surged forward, thundering through ranks of adolescent Ariakudo and stomping on any Visorak that got in the way. Within a few moments the Sharaku and his ride had gotten alongside the slowly-lumbering mother Ariakudo as she followed her brood onward. Then, using his powers to increase his speed, Hanak leaped from the Bladetort and onto the Ariakudo's cephalothorax, as the great tortoise circled around it and headed back toward where the Green One and Zanta were. Since Hanak had landed behind Argentaros, the alpha Quntaino hadn't noticed his presence — yet.

 

Blades smoldering, Hanak issued a challenge at his silvery nemesis. "Hey, you! Why don't you pick on somebody your own size?"

 

Argentaros turned leisurely and fixed his emotionless crystalline eyes on this newcomer. "Well, well, if it isn't the Sharaku leader! I did not expect you to make a move this rash. However, if you insist, we shall settle this matter the old fashioned way: face to face, hand to hand." He fully extended the serpentine living whiplash in his right hand, while rotating his other arm containing the trio of wicked blades into a fighting stance. "Your move," he snarled.

 

Hollering, Hanak slashed out with his swords as Argentaros pirouetted and connected with his own weapon. Atop the mother Ariakudo's moving back, the greatest duel in Terra Nui history began.

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 24
 
Shmau and the Nak, having been ordered by Apep to crush the Matoran, swiftly moved to begin their master's bidding. Uttering a piercing shriek, the lead Nak and his company dived toward the assembled Toa, followed by a snarling, scrambling mass of Sebau and Samiu. The Matoran had quickly regrouped into their fighting formations to hold their ground against the Betshu. Sekhet and her Av-Matoran guard led by Meti and Shna were surrounded by a group of Samiu, yet the sharp claws of these foes were no match for Sekhet's agility and her even sharper talons. Bast, on the other hand, was holding onto Wild Fang Tooth for dear life as the raging Makuta Hound ran throughout the horde of troglodytes, pouncing on and biting any that stood in its way.
 
Meanwhile, the six younger Toa Terra had decided to take out the Nak. Granted, there were two of the elite Betshu for every one of them, but Akito had said that these minions of Apep were roughly half as strong as a Toa, so Matoba decided to put this to the test. He and Heaka were facing Shmau, Bu, Hiq, and Shi, while their four teammates were dealing with the remaining eight Nak.
 
"You're even easier than those Vorukaia!" Heaka shouted, knocking back Shmau's meteor hammer with a thrust from her water harpoon. "I mean, they were no picnic themselves, but this is ridiculous!"
 
"Don't compare us to those abominations!" howled Shmau. "I met Amun once, and he was a pansy! Nothing can compare to how tough we are, except for our master and mistress!"
 
"I don't think so," Matoba added. He had been charging up a heat blast from his Kanohi Tomaje and enveloped Bu and Hiq in an intense wave, scorching the two Nak and grounding them as their wings caught on fire. "And compared to the Sharaku, you have nothing to brag about! My goodness, what a joke!"
 
Obviously the Nak, though far smarter than their dim-witted, diminutive Betshu cousins, hadn't the slightest clue as to what a Sharaku was. Nevertheless, they perceived this as an insult and continued their attempt to maim the Toa Terra.
 
Lyse had been suitably angered by the loss of his beloved Stryda, but having conceived a brilliant idea, he transformed into an unexpected powerhouse: an Uruvena from Punt Nui, which he had seen once on the way to Pe-Koro. A wild Rahi Uruvena would be slow as dirt and capable of only defense with its thick hide, but in the guise of the shaggy sloth Lyse was able to couple great maneuverability with the ability to withstand blows like a rock. Naturally, because he was using his Kanohi Deyku to mastermind this form, the Nak were surprised to find that the Uruvena they were fighting was still capable of launching blasts of air from its three-fingered hands. Occasionally Lyse would also revert back into Toa mode to get in a few quick strikes of his spears, before becoming a sloth once again.
 
Attar was using his swords to duel with Shi, the remaining Nak placed in charge of the elite Betshu group. This Nak was bound and determined to clobber the Toa of Ice with his meteor hammer, which he was swinging in a continuous arc around his body like a tornado. Using his Mask of Agility, however, Attar was mostly able to avoid this attack. At one point the hammer did connect in between Attar's cartwheels, and the blindsided Toa had one sword knocked out of his hand, but Attar responded with a blast of freezing ice that struck Shi and made the Nak collapse, his hammer swing interrupted. After that Attar was able to recover his weapon and continue fighting.
 
A short distance away, Nuukor and Pacha had to fend off the last five Nak for the Toa Terra. This wasn't particularly difficult, as Nuukor could shoot projectiles from his cannon and stab the Nak with his electropole to shock them, as well as solidify his body with his Kanohi Yovan to deflect physical strikes. Pacha had engaged several elite Betshu at once with her own pair of hammers, and thus had begun a strange clash of mace on mace with her assailants. Regardless, none of the Nak liked earth and stone attacks, which made their lives harder and which Pacha and Nuukor had no shortage of.
 
Among the three Turaga, each had gone off to assist one of the various groups struggling to hold off Apep and Aso's horde. Pelekua had found Uatchet and was helping the Matoran army in general, alongside such fighters as Horgah and Jezira. Akito, on the other hand, had joined Chompshi and Vrael to finish a mission that they had started on Punt Nui, which seemed a lifetime ago —  defeating the Queen of the Betshu herself.
 
This was a more daunting task than it had been before. Whereas in her Citadel Aso had been small and as short as a Turaga, this time she was a green and black colossus that towered over a head taller than the lanky Toa Terra of Electricity. And Apep's conniving mate had her usual bag of tricks up her proverbial sleeve, which she was not hesitant to use as she engaged her three valiant assailants. Strangely enough, it seemed as though she only possessed twenty-some of the traditional Makuta Kraata powers . . . but then again, Aso was not a traditional Makuta, nor even a Makuta at all, according to Turaga Atemu.
 
"Enough is enough!" Akito cried, as he dodged a swipe of Aso’s heavy tail. "Your treachery has gone on far too long, Aso, and this time we will put an end to it! No mercy!"
 
"That I'd like to see!" scoffed Aso, whipping her body around and unleashing a pulsating wave of shadow from her orange heartlight. "Soon my revenge will be complete, once I have slain you and my mate has massacred that pathetic Atemu, and the two of us have found that ridiculous red and black teammate of yours and destroyed him too!"
 
"Hey, leave Pelekua out of this!" shouted the elder of Terra Nui. "Once he's done aiding the Matoran in defeating all your Betshu, I'm sure he will be just as eager as I am to defeat you!"
 
Chompshi released a charged shot from his electrical cannon as he swung at Aso with his thunder lance. The thrust hit one of the female Atukam's back blades, but she retaliated by unleashing a wave of poison that slammed the Toa of Electricity backward. Vrael, seeing an opportunity, struck back with his crystal spear while trying to blanket Aso with a barrage of razor-sharp mineral shards. Most of these projectiles did hit the Queen of the Betshu on her tattooed Kanohi, eliciting from her a feral snarl of annoyance.
 
While this happened, Akito rolled between Aso's legs and stuck the lit tip of his glowing fire staff into her nearest thigh. Shrieking in anger, Aso moved away from attacking Chompshi and Vrael and turned toward her newest assailant. Chompshi and Vrael both charged at her with their pole arm weapons, but Aso had managed to ignore the burning sensation and teleport away from them in a rush of shadow, materializing behind them to continue her barrage again.
 
"Somehow this reminds me more of the fight against the Dark Lord," Vrael muttered. "In a way, it is easier; we have no Kyraikk, Ruhktar, or Ballom to worry about distracting us and getting in our way. Yet it is also more difficult because this hag seems to be stronger physically than that decrepit old Makuta. But we shall prevail in either case."
 
"Yes, fine. Less talk and more chainsaw!" Chompshi said, sending another blast of chain lightning at Aso.
 
Farther away from Aso, near the Great Philae Temple, another monumental fight was taking place. The six Toa Septiu, as well as Turaga Atemu, had taken on their ancient enemy, Apep. The King of the Betshu had not entered combat for millennia and so was refreshed and revitalized from his crippling defeat of the Toa Sah many ages ago, stronger than ever. This, coupled with the fact that his draconic new form was unlike anything Atemu remembered, made him a truly daunting foe.
 
"I will crush your bones beneath my feet, Atemu!" Apep roared, smashing his sizable evidence to this statement into the earth in a mighty stomp, attempting to flatten the Turaga of Plasma. "And I will bury this village once I am finished!"
 
The Scourge of Kemet Nui wasn't the only one speaking his mind. Tekhtekh, gleeful at the ability to incinerate spots of ground on mental demand from Apep, was being twirled around as its master fought and did its best to aim specifically at the Toa Septiu. Sutekh, however, still remained intent on retaking his cherished weapon, and so still cried out at the Wand of Chaos as he dodged its attacks and returned laser fire and weather effects accordingly.
 
Why would I ever waste time serving you or any Matoran? Tekhtekh hissed in the Toa of Storms' mind. You are a primitive and uncivilized race compared to the glory of the Atukam!
 
"Well, compared with those vile Betshu, we're on the level of the Great Spirit!" thundered Sutekh in return. "Don't you see what you're doing? Apep's promises of power have blinded you! He will owe you nothing once his mission has been completed but tyrannical rule! Then you'll be worse off than when I had you!"
 
"That, puny insect, is a lie!" Apep butted in, having heard both sides of the conversation, a feat which none of the other Toa Septiu nor Atemu could attest to. He addressed Tekhtekh reverently, speaking with a voice dripping with evil sweetness . . . or what could pass for it, at least. "Believe your new master, Wand of Chaos, you will only reap the benefits once this has been done!"
 
See? gloated Tekhtekh. The power of the relic will belong to Apep and Aso, and so I will achieve my destiny!
 
"You know nothing about destiny!" Sutekh responded. "All three virtues —  unity, duty, destiny —  they mean nothing to you! You are an instrument of diabolical wrath, whose only purpose was to inflict pain, and misery, and suffering! Your only fate will be ultimate destruction!"
 
I'll take my chances, was the reply, and Tekhtekh fought on. Apep wasn't solely using the staff to attack the Toa Septiu; his free hand pulsated with crackling blue energy, which he fired in series of blinding bursts at his assailants. Ausar and Auset were closest to one of these pulses, with the Toa of Fate summoning a flock of screeching Nui-Bauk with his Kanohi Begasu to heckle and distract the King of the Betshu, and the Toa of Plant Life attempting to create a snare of coiling vines to wrap around one of Apep's legs and bring down the titanic Atukam. However, Apep managed to drive off the Nui-Bauk and break the vines, and then hit the two Toa Septiu backward with one of his palm lasers.
 
"Yikes, that was powerful!" Ausar shouted, pulling himself up next to Auset. "We really need to hold him off if we have a chance to do what the Toa Sah did!"
 
"True, but back then he did not have Tekhtekh," said his female companion wisely, "nor was Atemu weaker, as he is now. There were also eight Toa Sah, whereas there are only seven of us."
 
"Still, I'd take those odds any day!" came the robust response from Atemu. "I may not be as good as I once was in combat, but with your help, young Toa, we can defeat this monstrosity!"
 
"Monstrosity!?" Apep grimaced. "I'll have you know that I am the pinnacle of physical perfection! Along with my mate, of course."
 
This remark wasn't really heard, though, as in the din of Apep's onslaught two of the other Toa Septiu had decided another strategy. Using his airfoils and zero-gravity powers, Heru had lifted off and was firing at the Scourge of Kemet Nui with his launchers. Nebt-het had joined him using her own natural wings, and having been relatively silent for most of the battle, she now unleashed a deafening Power Scream, a veritable shockwave of sound that knocked over several Sebau in the vicinity and made Apep wince from attacking Ausar and Auset. However, the evil Atukam decided to follow up with a Sonic attack of his own that was equally ear-shattering. Unprepared for this kind of counterattack, the startled Toa of Gravity and Sonics were battered by sound and knocked out of the sky, landing in a heap next to where Anpu was. The Toa of Magnetism had been busy himself, trying to use his element to pin down Apep or hit the tyrant with some martial art moves, but occasionally had needed to help any injured teammates.
 
Anpu glanced up from checking with Ausar and Auset and regarded the two Toa Septiu fliers as they readied themselves. "Any problems?"
 
"What?" asked the temporarily-deafened Nebt-het, brushing herself off with her claws. "I can't hear you; Apep's blast was too loud!"
 
"Maybe you should take some tips from Uatchet for a while," joked Heru as he propelled himself into the air again. "I'm sure she would love to teach you the basics of communication without sound!"
 
Nebt-het hadn't heard the snarky comment; her sensitive eardrums were still recovering from being battered by the sound wave. Anpu just shrugged and continued to fight, using a magnetic barrier to repel Tekhtekh, which Apep was bearing down on him. The tactic worked, and with a mental cry of anguish the Wand of Chaos shot backward, nearly thrown out of the Atukam's hand.
 
"Toa, this is nothing but a mere paltry nuisance!" Apep roared. "I need not concern myself with swatting you; there are bigger and more important things at hand!" Turning toward where Aso was, he yelled above the din of battle at his mate. "Now, my dear, the real winning can begin! I'm going in!"
 
"Excellent, darling!" shrieked Aso, still battling Chompshi, Vrael, and Turaga Akito. "Forget sending the swarms in; we'll storm it ourselves!"
 
"What on earth is going on?" Pelekua looked quizzically at Uatchet, as the pair of sages knocked out a downed Samiu. "Where do they think they're going?"
 
Uatchet thought for a moment, but as the astute Sister realized what Apep and Aso were plotting, her burnished Hau turned pale. She began signing furiously. "They're heading for the Great Philae Temple! We must stop them, or they will open it by force! Once they reach the catacombs, we'll be done for! Move!"
 
"Ausar! You have to prevent the Scourges from opening the Great Philae!" said Nekhebet, jumping on top of a falling Sebau as she cupped her hands to help amplify her raised voice.
 
The Toa Septiu saw Apep move away from them, but it was only when he half flapped, half lumbered towards the towering place of worship did this implication fully dawn on them. Though the bulk of the Matoran and Betshu continued fighting, the younger Toa Terra and Nak ceased momentarily to watch, as did the two elder Toa Terra and the Turaga of Terra Nui. To their own horror, the gleeful Aso slithered to where Apep stood, and together the two evil beings began to do something that had never, ever happened before in the history of Kemet Nui, in all the ages that the Holy Order of the Sisterhood of Het-hert had peacefully resided on the desert isle. They forced open the doors of the Great Philae Temple, a building that had always remained unscathed and untouched by invasion, formerly a pillar of safety in a war-torn village, and now the final victim of the wrath of the Atukam.
 
A pitch-blank, voluminous hand of shadow emerged from both the King and Queen of the Betshu, one from Aso's heartlight and the other from Apep's free energy-radiating palm. These two malevolent harbingers shot forward until they gripped the stone edifice of the massive doorway, and then as the two titans pulled with all their might, slowly but surely, the doors began to move. Despite all of the intricate locks and fail-safe mechanisms implemented by Uatchet and Nekhebet, the doors could not remain closed. With a wrenching creak and a crumbling of stone and mortar, they were thrown wide, revealing the hallowed and sunlit inner sanctum that was the main hall of the Great Philae Temple.
 
Uatchet and Nekhebet could barely watch; instead, with tears in their eyes, they confronted the slavering Sebau and Samiu once more. Horgah and Jezira barked out orders for the Matoran army to form a blockade of bodies to prevent the Betshu from reaching the temple. Apep and Aso themselves cackled in triumph, and began their march inside the Temple. Instead, as they came within the sanctum, they were confronted by the angered and determined fourteen Toa and two Turaga Sah, who appeared defiantly in their way.
 
"Concerned about your sacred shrine, eh?" scoffed Apep. "Then if you insist on barring the way of my mate and myself, we will be forced to destroy you and annihilate the Matoran you are sworn to protect. Your fate won't be pretty, that's for certain."
 
"We aren't scared of you!" Auset said. "This temple belongs to the Sisterhood of Het-hert, and we will not let you blemish its visage or plunder its treasures! You'll have to get through all of us first!"
 
"No problem," was the reply from Aso. "Betshu! Pillage the village and help us remove these obstacles!"
 
But as she and Apep were about to attack the Toa once more, a clarion voice rose above the tumult, silencing the war cries of the Matoran and the hisses and howls of the troglodytes, and causing even the enraged Atukam to pause.
 
"Not so fast, evildoers! Take one more step within that sanctuary and you shall live to regret it!"
 
From the ramparts of Tai-Koro, a silvery and azure figure stepped into view. Old and short of stature, he was garbed in flowing and splendid robes, carried an old staff of rank, and moved on only one original leg, as the other had been replaced by a metal peg. He wore a Kanohi Mahiki, the Noble Mask of Illusion, and as he spoke the fiery, yet serene, expression on his face conveyed the fact that his words contained no falsehoods.
 
The Toa Septiu looked in amazement upon this Turaga, unable to believe what they were witnessing. This was the being who had mentored them, who had been like a father to them, who had trained them in their new powers and new mask capabilities upon becoming Toa Septiu. And now, after what had seemed like an eternity of absence, he had returned.
 
"Is it . . . could it be . . .?" Auset whispered.
 
"Of course!" Ausar was grinning from one end of his Kanohi to the other. "He's back, all right!"
 
"Who the Karzahni are you?" Apep demanded, flabbergasted at this strange and unfamiliar new arrival.
 
"My name is Turaga Aritonu," said the elder. "And by attacking the six pupils of mine, with a weapon belonging to one of them no less, you have just made a very big mistake!"
 
Taken aback by this impudence, Aso snarled. "Yeah? You and what army?"
 
"That under the command of an old associate of mine. He had been imprisoned recently, for many years in fact, on the island of Kush Nui. But I found him and helped him escape, and we returned to Punt Nui, from whence we came here. He's brought some friends to this party."
 
Aritonu held out his arm, and from behind him a group of Matoran clambered up onto the village walls, each of them armed to the teeth with powerful weapons. But the appearances of these Matoran were what caught the Toa Terra and Turaga Akito's attention, especially that of Vrael, who seemed both overjoyed and deeply moved. They were the inhabitants of Pe-Koro, all the seasoned fighting villagers of Punt Nui and friends of Akito's company. Whetar led the assembly, as usual, followed by many recognizable faces: Hathi and Reda, Taiki and Komo, Delan and Murtik, Ogigi and Jahpex, Neesau and Torval, to name a few. As these fighters stared sternly down at the Betshu, hope filled the hearts of the Matoran of Tai-Koro again. Most smiled, some even cheered.
 
And the Punt Nui warriors were not alone. Stepping up to join Aritonu was one more figure from the past, one deemed forgotten ages ago after a cataclysmic disaster had split in three the island he called home. He was the same height as the Turaga of Power Scream, only armored in orange and white with coppery robes, and he held a distinctive hammer. Around him buzzed a menacing swarm of Kofo-Kopen, proof of his hypnotic power over insects.
 
The three Turaga Sah gasped. Pelekua did a double-take, then looked back at his two teammates in utter disbelief. Atemu spoke to Akito, his voice filled with awe.
 
"I don't believe it! After all these years we took him for a goner . . . yet he managed to survive!"
 
"Yes my friend," Akito said, beaming and putting his arm around Atemu's shoulder, "this day is full of surprises. The odds have swung in our favor —  even more so than they had ever been."
 
Aso was absolutely livid. The being whose island she had assumed control of, her archenemy among all the despised Toa Sah, still lived. "But you're dead!" she screamed. "I saw the Great Cataclysm shatter Punt Nui, and I witnessed you and over half the Matoran population being swept out to sea by the tsunami! And then, when against all odds you impossibly survived to be washed up on the shores of Kush Nui, I ordered your unconscious form to be thrown into the Mokhugra, where you surely finally died. This cannot be!"
 
Turaga Sah Khepera retained a calm look on his face, much like Aritonu. Yet he pointed the heavy head of his Hive Hammer directly at the Queen of the Betshu, and addressed her in a tone that revealed the one thing, and one thing only, that had been on his mind after being freed from captivity. The thing he wanted most after learning that Aso had helped Apep take over Kemet Nui: vengeance on the one who had betrayed his team. And now, leader of his people once more, he would have that revenge above all costs.
 
"Why hello, Aso! Happy to see me? Or more surprised? Either way, you're going down."


Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 25

 

Hanak swung his fire swords as broadly as he could, trying to get a hit on Argentaros as the two sparred on top of the colossal mother Ariakudo. Having never fought the alpha Quntaino before, it was obvious that the silver mammalian leader was the most powerful and skilled opponent that the Sharaku of Fire had ever faced. Argentaros moved with his triple-clawed blade and whiplash as though they were part of his own body, something that not even Gamma, the best sword user out of all of Argarak's professional Captains, could lay claim to. Indeed, the only other great blade master Hanak had ever seen, the insane poison chameleon Scytale, had attacked in a wild and savage style, using rapid and unpredictable strikes to keep his foes second-guessing. But now, whereas Hanak had always felt secure taking on the hulking Daigolva, he acknowledged the very real possibility that he might lose this duel.

 

He couldn't let that happen. He couldn't let his team and all of Terra Nui down.

 

Yet as he and Argentaros continued to exchange parries, a new voice entered Hanak's mind, one that had never nagged him before. It was a proud voice, one that as a Torika he had been constantly exposed to as the stern individual, sometimes kind but usually self-serving, ordered him around. Argarak.

 

What did I tell you all those years ago, Hanak? sneered the evil Sharaku. You honestly didn't believe you could ever fight, did you? I never trained you for that; how you and your pathetic little friends ever managed to learn is beyond me. And this silver beast, my oh my! Zakarath would be impressed by his fighting style!

 

Leave me alone, Argarak! thought Hanak with all his might, trying to block the malicious influence of his former master, while still fighting Argentaros. I no longer have to answer to you! You've been dead forty years, slain by Chazok's bullet! This is my fight, and I will finish it! And I will win!

 

If you say so, boy, said Argarak, and then his presence disappeared from Hanak's mind.

 

Argentaros, meanwhile, seemed to take a different view of his opponent's moves. As he stepped to the side, slowly circling on the Ariakudo's cephalothorax to match Hanak, he gave an acknowledgement of a fair fight. "We seem to be evenly matched, Sharaku. For all your misguided views, you do know your weapon well. A pity that I must defeat you."

 

"That still won't happen!" Hanak insisted. Making a swift sideways chop, one of his swords connected with Argentaros's side, inflicting a minor burning blow. Growling, Argentaros gritted his teeth, but kept on going, lunging forward with the razor-sharp blades on his left arm. Hanak, temporarily on the defensive, couldn't throw up his fire swords in time to deflect this attack, but instead leaned backward as much and as hard as he could. The Quntaino's weapon went right over him.

 

"Not too shabby," said Argentaros. "Perhaps you are indeed as strong as Daigolva told me."

 

"Well, he's certainly got the expertise to say that, when it comes to facing me," admitted Hanak. Out of the corner of his eye, he could actually see the vermillion brute swinging his broadsword, facing Zanta and the Green One alongside Snimurai. In fact, Hank could make out all of his Sharaku teammates in their respective zones of combat: Vukaz fighting Predacron, Thukor taking on Carcarinax, and Rieka and Kavan going against Nosfernox and Icrizahk. They were still in the same areas around the moving mother Ariakudo as they had been, still carrying on valiantly. With Argentaros occupied fighting Hanak, the Ta, Po, and Ko-Matoran could spend their time helping their friends against the Rahi running amok. Machi was taking the Zykeral and Ascipitero on a wild Gukko chase, zooming above Hanak with a rush of air as he flung Madu Cabolo at his pursuers. Elsewhere, the Acko were still battling the juvenile Ariakudo, the brood of Argentaros's steed, while the Visorak clashed with the Necrovak and Aquavak as well as those two species' Va. Only Gorgorak really seemed absent from any combat at all: the blue Visorak queen had decided to not just sit around, and was dragging herself and her sedan chair very slowly toward the rest of the spider Rahi who served her.

 

On the other hand, Terra-Koro hadn't looked this bad since the Battle of Terra Nui, when it had been conquered by, then freed from, and finally attacked again by, the Dark Lord's Drone army. Several huts had caved in, while a few more had their roofs on fire. The well seemed to be doing adequately, since it was being defended by a group of gallant Ga-Matoran who would periodically grab a bucket full of water to toss at the burning buildings. But otherwise, the battle was taking its toll on the peaceful village. And time was still of the essence. Hanak had to prevent Argentaros and the other Quntaino from reaching the Hakeahu statue, and this opportunity was running out.

 

"Nevertheless, you cannot stop me," Argentaros was saying, wagging a finger at Hanak as if to taunt him. "Sooner or later, you will tire, and I will reach my destination."

 

"I don't think so," replied Hanak. He was continuing to hold his ground, sending up wave after wave of flame-engulfed sword strikes at his towering nemesis. But Argentaros was very slippery a foe: while his strategy focused on being defensive, he nevertheless could surprise Hanak with blows of astounding agility. When Hanak moved to the side to avoid a lash from his opponent's whip, Argentaros responded with a punch. It hit Hanak, sending the Sharaku back a few steps, but he was still able to feint and avoid a claw swipe from Argentaros. At this point, Hanak rushed forward, hitting Argentaros with a body slam as hard as he could. This time, both beings were knocked down on top of their carapace battlefield. Still, the two of them got up again, facing each other with weapons ready while simultaneously glaring. So far neither of them had gotten the upper hand in this duel. But that was about to change.

 

As Hanak prepared another barrage of scorching slashes, the Quntaino leader extended his living whiplash to full length. Before the Sharaku of Fire could respond, this serpentine, worm-like creature had attached to his leg. Then Argentaros pulled, and the jerking caused Hanak to topple, falling onto his side. The mother Ariakudo was still moving, and as she lumbered onward Hanak could not get good traction. He tumbled over the side of her rounded body, barely managing to hang on tightly with his hands.

 

Argentaros swiveled and saw Hanak in this position of weakness below him, hanging precariously three bio above the ground. "This isn't the end of me!" shouted Hanak. "I won't let you succeed! I won't!"

 

"This fight is over. Goodbye, Hanak." The silver Quntaino didn't even step on Hanak's fingers to torture him. Instead he lashed out with a kick, knocking the Sharaku of Fire off of the giant arachnid and sending him tumbling onto the ground below.

 

Hanak wasn't hurt, but as he hit the ground he came to a sudden realization as to exactly where he was. This smooth stone was the terrace extending for several bio around the Hakeahu fountain. He was in the center of the village.

 

Oh no. Mata Nui, no! Looking up, he saw the mother Ariakudo finally come to a standstill, her legs brushing up against the Toa-sized podium used for important announcements by the citizens of Terra-Koro. Only a short distance away stood the statue. To make matters worse, the other six Quntaino and their Rahi cohorts had apparently dragged, or somehow caused the movement of, their Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko assailants into a cluster around the center of the village. Hank could see all the familiar landmarks: Turaga Akito and Hakeahu's house, the homes of the Toa Terra and his own team, and Sari and Takan's forge.

 

Though his duel with Argentaros had indeed lasted a half hour, it seemed as though an unbelievably vast distance had been crossed in that time. The Quntaino had reached their goal. It was too late.

 

"Hah!" crowed Argentaros jubilantly. With a mental prod, he bade the giant Ariakudo to bend down her aged head. Then he gracefully stepped down from her torso onto this armored cranium and descended onto the terrace stone. With his goal in plain sight, he turned toward the battle taking place all around him and concentrated his powers.

 

Suddenly, every single skirmish, every little tussle taking place between Matoran and Rahi, Bohrok and Visorak, Acko and Ariakudo, came to an end. From the alpha Quntaino's supreme presence, a powerful mental command caused all conflict to cease immediately. Terra-Koro became deathly quiet, with all parties looking toward the center of the village. Its defenders saw in shock that their home had been breached, and stared in horror, sadness, and anger. The Rahi were quiet, still under the Quntaino's control and pacified: the Rahanivika positioned themselves upright; the Zkyeral, Magraka, and Ascipitero landed; and the Thylacine sat on its haunches. Meanwhile, the Visorak started cheerily gleefully. The throne bearers returned to Gorgorak's sedan chair, where she still sat, and brought the obese monarch right up to where the six subordinate Quntaino, all assembled in a line, roared and screeched and bellowed in triumph.

 

Zanta, Vukaz, Kavan, Thukor, and Rieka all ran to where Hanak stood. None of them could believe what had just happened. It was as if all their efforts had been for naught.

 

Surveying his conquered prize with the air of a satisfied overlord, Argentaros put away his weapons and cracked his knuckles. "Desist all fighting!" he announced. When this had been achieved he gave a toothy smirk. "Thank you. That is better." Then he spoke to the six lesser Quntaino gathered before him, as well as all the Rahi scattered around the village center. "Well, my brothers and my people, today is a momentous occasion. Now, we will finish what we began after being born from the lightning strike on Mount Tongaru, at the Festival of Diamonds not so long ago. I swore then that we would find the Kanohi Zlinj, wherever it might be. And after much strife, we can finally say that our mission has become fulfilled."

 

Argentaros turned away from the other Quntaino and confidently strode up the stone terrace to the fountain, his smile replaced by an eerie calm. He seemed suddenly oblivious to the beings around him as he stepped over the raised stones encircling the fountain, planted his feet in the gently flowing fountain waters, and slowly took the remaining steps forward until he stood face to face with the stone likeness of Hakeahu. Idly, the alpha Quntaino flicked a few black particles of ash, which must have been born on the wind from one of Hanak's blades to land there, from the carved axe in the figure's hand. Then, he raised both of his arms to clasp the sparkling crystal Zlinj, fixed on the fountain for the last forty years.

 

Hanak, who had come to his feet but remained rooted in place, entranced in watching the Quntaino, suddenly realized what Argentaros intended to do. For some reason defeating the Sharaku and their allies, besting Hanak in battle, and then advancing to the almost sacred center of the village wasn't enough for Argentaros — he now was going to go one step further and desecrate the Hakeahu statue. Rage filling him, Hanak lunged forward, grabbing Argentaros's arm even as Argentaros wrapped his clawed digits around the curved, projecting sides of the Kanohi to slowly begin prying the mask away from its long resting place. The Quntaino leader whirled his entire body in surprise, and his startled turn tore the ancient mask entirely away. However, instead of its interior being coated in stone and masonry, the crystalline Zlinj's inner surface was completely smooth.

 

Before Hanak could look any longer at the Zlinj, the Kanohi blazed with a radiant glow, and countless visions began pouring into his mind and that of Argentaros. The alpha Quntaino's touch had triggered something within the mask, and it released to the beings nearest to it, like its Legendary counterpart had done before, all of the sights and events it had witnessed in its time on Terra Nui. Millions of images flashed into Hanak's mind instantly, and he experienced things he had never known about the island before.

 

Hanak saw the dim, twisting underground tunnels in which the Zlinj had rested from millennia, the rookie Toa Terra finally removing it and bringing it to Turaga Akito's hut for examination. He saw the mask being placed upon the face of the Hakeahu fountain, followed by forty years of events in the Matoran village. Matoran bringing in fishing haul, material from the mines, and rare goods traded from other islands. Muudabok wandered placidly by the Zlinj's view, Hemisva scuttled below it, tame Pikobe drank from the fountain, and Ikki flew right past on various occasions. Even Shredder, king of the Collosorahk, tunneled to the surface outside Terra-Koro one night to rest on the cool soil and yawned, a glimmer of crimson deep in his throat. An entire panorama of the Matoran existence on Terra Nui passed by, displaying every interaction the Zlinj saw. Youngsters played games and picked flowers, adults traded with Wula or bought tools, armor and masks from the forge, the Green One brought in wooden crafts to barter, and elders sat swapping stories or reminiscing about days gone by. Matoran lived, and learned, and loved, within the Zlinj's memories. Even as the visions came to encompass the events of the last few weeks, the Matoran, Torika, and their Rahi companions still remained united as one family, concerned about the arrival of the Quntaino and the safety of not only themselves, but their village, their island, and their absent companions in the dome of Kemet Nui, fighting to preserve all they had. It was breathtaking. It was beautiful. It was life.

 

Just when the Zlinj's memories seemed exhausted, a new set of visions entered Hanak's mind, beginning with an intense flash of light, fading away to reveal the broken keystones and Suva on Mount Tongaru. As the viewpoint changed to lift from the ground, Hanak realized he was seeing events from the perspective of Argentaros. He saw the six other Quntaino emerging from their eggs, shakily getting to their feet, and starting to communicate. Slowly, as they moved down the mountain, their speech developed from incomprehensible sounds to Rahi dialects. Then, he saw something he would never have expected from the seemingly-brutal and relentless Quntaino: them exhibiting kindness. Argentaros was in a field, he noticed, on the far end of the verdant plains from Terra-Koro, sitting among an unusual sight — a pride of Thylacines. He was communicating with the majestic felines with low rumbling sounds, as the rest of the Quntaino sat watching calmly. This had never occurred to Hanak, that a being who passed for a narrow-minded, obsessive dictator was just as much a caring soul capable of compassion. Argentaros and his brethren loved Terra Nui as much as the Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko did. They just hadn't revealed it to the Sharaku.

 

Otherwise, though, he saw the impatient side of Argentaros. The leader's next sojourn took him to the Sharakoro Islets, where he had wandered around for some time surveying the jagged cliffs and roaring in frustration. Yet even as he left to again traverse the island in search of his quarry, Argentaros also used his time to idly mingle with the varied Rahi species he passed by, from the docile Nukepi to strangely peaceful Kompiki, from hovering Hummaera to even a Tyrannarahk nest with its brood of adolescent dragons. Despite his focused goal, the leader of the Quntaino lived an existence as magical as that of the other inhabitants of Terra Nui, at one with his beloved island.

 

Abruptly, the visions faded away, leaving Hanak with only his own sight. Only a few seconds had actually passed, and none of the beings in the village center had moved, watching the fading brilliance of the crystal Zlinj. Hanak released the hold he still had kept on Argentaros's arm, and suddenly found his voice.

 

"Argentaros?" he asked quietly. The Quntaino lifted his gaze from the Kanohi to look at Hanak, and the Sharaku realized with a start that his own memories must have been viewed by Argentaros. "Why do you desire the Kanohi Zlinj?" Hanak finished. The alpha Quntaino turned away briefly to place the crystal Zlinj back on the statue's face, then faced Hanak to answer his question.

 

"You do not understand, Sharaku," he growled softly. As he spoke Argentaros stepped out of the fountain, leaving the stone terracing to depart toward the grassy plains of Terra Nui. "I do not desire the mask for myself. My brothers and I come to destroy it. And now, at long last, I know of its location — the maw of the Collosorahk you call Shredder."

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 26

 

With the new arrivals from Punt Nui lifting their spirits, the Matoran of Tai-Koro continued their fight stronger than ever. Immediately after addressing Aso, Turaga Khepera had rushed down to assist his beleaguered teammate Akito against the Queen of the Betshu; while Turaga Aritonu joined Turaga Atemu and his six pupils, the Toa Septiu, in their fight against the Betshu King. Meanwhile, Whetar had barked out orders to his fifty-odd soldiers to assemble into squads and take on the troglodytes directly, to assist the Matoran of Kemet Nui. Still, the no-nonsense Ta-Matoran had another goal in mind: along with a group of Punt Nui's finest fighters, he went to assist some old friends of his, the younger Toa Terra.

 

Shmau and his Nak were greatly incensed by the sudden appearance of more Matoran. While they still considered the odds of the Atukam triumphing to be completely in the Betshu's favor, they weren't getting anywhere toward defeating the Toa Terra. For the Nak, while undoubtedly Apep and Aso's finest fighters, never really congregated into groups while fighting. Usually only one, or a few at most, would defend an outpost and command the legions of Sebau and Samiu at their disposal. Only rarely did the gangly fiends ever come together under their master and mistress's cause. Such had happened millennia ago — when the Toa Sah had defeated the Betshu — back when these Nak hadn't even been transformed, and their predecessors had been killed.

 

This, above anything else, was the Nak's weakness. Strong as they were, they never fought as a team. It was every advanced troglodyte for themselves. Ordinarily this tactic worked for the rank-and-file Sebau or Samiu, who were so numerous that they could just mob an enemy and overwhelm them with strength in numbers. The same method had been used by Aso's Vorukan on Punt Nui. Her Vorukaia, however, had fought united. But the Nak never had helped each other out in battle before, and they were so used to the old Betshu ways by which they had conquered the island that they refused to accept any other Nak's safety as more important than their own. It would prove to be their downfall.

 

As the Nak continued blindly to try to best them, the Toa Terra still fought on bravely. Lyse had abandoned his shape-shifting into the Uruvena with his angular Kanohi Dayku, and returned from being a shaggy brown sloth into his nimble green Toa self. Otherwise, the Betshu warriors had gotten themselves in such a position that they were completely surrounded by the Toa; but unless something could be done to defeat them all, this struggle would continue to go on.

 

Matoba turned from fighting Bu and Hiq to address Heaka next to him. "We have to stop them soon!" the burly team leader said. "Otherwise, our friends may be in trouble. For instance, I don't know how long the Toa Septiu can hold out against Apep and Tekhtekh!"

 

"Perhaps trap them?" said the Toa of Water, still going against Shi and Shmau. It was evident to Matoba, though, that all the Toa Terra were taking a beating. While the Nak were mostly a nuisance, battling them could waste vital time needed to stop the real threat — the Atukam.

 

Some relief came, though, in the form of the Punt Nui Matoran. Whetar led the charge, his twin short swords held high and his red Hau showing its usual stern expression. "Hang on, mates! I'm coming to save the lot of you!" he cried, as he led the Le-Matoran Taiki, Ga-Matoran Reda, and Onu-Matoran Delan into the fray.

 

"Matoran?" Shmau snarled. "Let's kill them!" Leaping up into the air, he moved away from the rest of the Nak and landed in front of the Matoran, brandishing his metallic Meteor Hammer. Quick as he was, though, Shmau had underestimated his new assailants. Taiki ran at him with arms wide, silver staves at the ready, and grabbed onto the elite Betshu's left leg as Reda, with her harpoon, grabbed onto Shmau's right leg. This caused the startled Nak to topple, and he was soon set upon by all four Matoran, causing him to start screeching as he struggled to get up. Eventually, he was able to right himself, throwing off the warrior Matoran in the process and charging back into his previous fray with the Toa Terra.

 

Seeing this happen, however, had given Matoba an idea. Trap them! That's the answer! he thought. At first he racked his memory in search of a maneuver that might work; but then he remembered a story told to him by Turaga Akito ages ago. According to legend, the heroic Toa Nuva had imprisoned three of the Makuta's Rahkshi simply by combining their powers in a unique way. It could work. After all, the Toa Terra possessed the same elements as those near-mythical heroes of yore. So the Toa of Fire decided he'd give it a try.

 

"Pacha! Nuukor! Send sand and earth at the Nak, now!" Matoba yelled.

 

"What?" came the response from the Toa of Stone and the Toa of Earth.

 

"Just do it!"

 

Looking at each other and shrugging, the two Toa did as they were told. Using their powers to pick up the dust and black soil that was omnipresent in Tai-Koro's streets, they created a smokescreen of sand around the twelve Nak, temporarily blinding and disorienting the Betshu. Next Matoba shouted at Lyse, who had just touched down upon the ground from hovering, which the Toa of Air had been doing to avoid Nak attacks. "Now, Lyse, use a wind blast!"

 

"Okay, fire-spitter!" Lyse replied. Channeling his powers to create a vortex of billowing air, Lyse flung this at the Nak, which turned the earth around them into a raging dust-devil, a cyclone of sand that spun them around at a tremendous speed like a whirlpool. Once this had been accomplished, Matoba took a moment to use his own powers. During the last few minutes of fighting, he had been storing thermal energy from his surroundings with his orange Kanohi Tomaje, the Mask of Heat; and now his reserves were at full, causing his vermillion armor to shimmer as it burned red-hot from the intense temperature. He concentrated this blast of heat to where it would envelop all the Nak, and unleashed it.

 

What happened next was predictable, but impressive nonetheless. Immediately upon touching the whirling sand, Matoba's heat wave caused the silica compounds to solidify, forming a glowing tube of molten glass around the dozen Nak. Now the trapped Betshu were subjected to extreme heat, but this prison wouldn't last in the current state. "Heaka, use water!" Matoba cried. "And Attar, freeze this thing afterward!"

 

"Got it!" said Heaka, blasting the glass with a torrent of liquid as cold as she could make it. There was a hiss and crackle as thick steam rose from the glass vortex, and when it had lifted the now-cooled material had shrunk and hardened. But there was still one last thing to be done to make the effect permanent. Following Heaka, Attar thrust his freezing sword-tips into the glass, sending all the ice he could muster into his strike. Within seconds, a thick crust of frost had covered the Nak's prison, seeping through the crystallized silica and even filling the spaces between the immobilized servants of Apep.

 

Without air, the Nak would likely suffocate, Matoba knew. Soon, they would probably die. But the Toa of Fire also knew, as did all five of his teammates and the four Matoran who had joined them, that if the Nak hadn't been defeated more lives could have been lost among the brave defenders of Tai-Koro. Sometimes the Toa Creed had to be bypassed. In order to achieve a victory, there had to be some sacrifice.

 

"Well, that was impressive, eh?" Whetar said with gusto, as he and his three warriors got to their feet. "We make a good team, I do believe. Just like old times."

 

"Yes, indeed," replied Matoba. "Thank you, my friends, for that help. Whetar, Taiki, Reda, Delan, you go and help the Matoran of this village against the Sebau and Samiu. We Toa have bigger Ruki to fry."

 

As the Punt Nui Matoran hastily ran off to where the Kemet Nui villagers fought on, Attar pointed toward the Great Philae Temple. "Come. The Toa Septiu need our assistance. Apep awaits."

 

Nodding, the other Toa Terra left the frozen Nak, and the six heroes headed inside the vast place of worship, where the real final battle would be waged.

 

------

 

As the Matoran and Betshu hordes fought outside, the two titanic Atukam still continued forward within the Great Philae Temple. Inside the sunlit inner sanctum, light poured in through the great stained-glass windows and cast eerie shadows on the beings inside. Apep and Aso seemed relentless in their onslaught, bent on reaching the doors that would lead deeper into the temple and eventually down to where the sacred relic sat. But this onslaught had been halted, at least temporarily, by the resourceful actions of Turaga Atemu, Turaga Akito, the Toa Septiu, Chompshi, and Vrael.

 

Apep was furious, roaring as he attacked and waving Tekhtekh to and fro. He didn't really care about the team of Toa surrounding him; the real target of his rage was Atemu. The brunt of his brutal fighting style was aimed at the little Turaga of Plasma, who could barely dent the Scourge of Kemet Nui with his Superthermal Sickle and so had to concentrate on dodging, as best as he could, the blue energy bursts from Apep's palms.

 

"You defeated me once, but that will not happen again, Atemu!" thundered the Atukam. "Thousands of years of being imprisoned have taken no toll on me, and I am stronger than ever! But you are old and weak! One on one, I could step on you and win!"

 

"That's not going to happen, Apep!" replied the Turaga, running past the Scourge's legs and taking cover behind Ausar and Auset, both of whom had their swords at the ready and were striking at the Betshu King with fencer-style slashes. "Soon, I will have more than just seven to aid me!"

 

"Wait, there they are now!" Aritonu cried. He had teamed up with Nebt-het in delivering sonic bursts and other such attacks, only his fighting method involved a sawblade rather than sharp claws. True enough, as Anpu looked toward the open entrance of the Great Philae, he could see the forms of the Toa Terra running inside, weapons ready.

 

"Sorry we're slow-late!" Lyse said, as he and his team assembled behind the Toa Septiu. "But we had to quick-fast freeze-chill twelve popsicles out there!"

 

Aso, fighting Chompshi, Vrael, Akito, and Khepera nearby, understood what this meant. "Our Nak!?" she screeched. "Darling, they've gotten rid of the Nak!"

 

"Fine, then I will return the favor," Apep growled, clenching Tekhtekh in both clawed hands and swinging the Wand of Chaos toward the direction of the Toa of Storms, who was closest to him.

 

Sutekh, prior to this, had not heard any comments from his former staff since the Atukam had moved inside the temple. Now, however, he did hear something coming out of the evil silver weapon. I have a better idea, Apep, it hissed. Forget taking out the majority of them, as only one will suffice to lower their morale as they have lowered ours. Cut off a snake's head, and its body will crumple.

 

"What?" Sutekh yelled at Tekhtekh, momentarily confused as to what it had said. But then he came to a sudden realization, and he spoke again with fear in his voice. "You'd better not do what I think you're about to do!"

 

Watch me, gloated Tekhtekh. As Apep raised it above his head in a broad swing, the orb in the Wand's center began charging with power. Then, while the blow was descending and the Toa scattered to avoid it, Tekhtekh fired, releasing a vermillion beam of crackling energy straight at the assailant closest to Apep — the one who would be most vulnerable to it.

 

Nimble as he was, Turaga Atemu could not move out of the way. The blast hit him directly, cracking his armor and burning his robes. Glancing down at his chest, where a gaping wound had been created, Atemu could barely issue a gasp. Dropping his staff, he crumpled to the floor of the Temple and lay still.

 

"No!" thundered Ausar, enraged by watching this happen. Auset screamed in anguish, while Heru, Nebt-het and Sutekh glared at Apep out of hatred. Even Anpu, pacifist though he was, became furious as he saw his mentor fall. The Toa Terra, unable to believe what had just happened, could only gape in surprise, while Aritonu cast his eyes downward in dismay. Now they had all seen the true evil of Tekhtekh, a malice that nearly matched that of Apep himself. The Wand of Chaos had to be destroyed at all costs.

 

"You see!" Aso spat contemptuously. She and her assailants had paused momentarily to watch as the Turaga of Plasma collapsed. "That one is on the verge of death, and my mate barely lifted a finger! Now, you're next, Akito!"

 

The glowering Turaga Sah of Magma glanced at his fallen teammate from behind his ruby Kanohi Zalmex, barely able to keep from weeping. Then he slowly returned his gaze to Aso, banged the butt of his fire staff on the ground, and cocked his laser crossbow.

 

"Turaga, don't do it!" pleaded Chompshi, as he stood with Vrael and Khepera. "Revenge will not defeat Aso any better!"

 

"But it will put me at peace," vowed the elder of Terra Nui. "For Atemu!" he hollered, tears gushing down his face, and he ran toward Aso as fast as he could, aiming his crossbow directly at the female Atukam's mask. Aso seemed taken aback by this response, not accustomed to this seemingly-feeble Turaga attempting a last-ditch move to destroy her. Nevertheless, she swung her tail back and forth, licked her jagged lips and fangs with her serpent-like tongue, and cracked her knuckles in anticipation. Just as Akito neared her and prepared his shot, Aso let loose a blast of dark energy from her orange heartlight, intermixed with a pulsating tangerine vortex that curved around it like plasma.

 

Akito knew something like this was coming. Perhaps he knew that his fate would be linked to Atemu's. Yet he did not cry out in pain as the energy barrage hit him. Instead, as it singed his body and threw him through the air until he came to rest in a heap next to the Turaga of Kemet Nui, he remained stoic and collected throughout, one last determined expression still plastered on his face.

 

Yet, Akito had not failed in his endeavor. Aso cringed as a burning sensation shot through her green rune-tattooed forehead. A neat hole had been burned through her ebony hood, the result of the laser crossbow being fired as its wielder was catapulted backward. It was not much, this wound, but as far as giving Akito's companions vital time, it was enough.

 

Turaga Khepera sank to his knees in sorrow, devastated by the apparent loss of two of his beloved comrades. But Chompshi and Vrael did not look back toward their mentor, the wise sage who had taught them all he knew and had turned them into fearless warriors and accomplished Toa. To do so and grieve would be to dishonor him as he lay mortally wounded. Instead, they concentrated on the task at hand, to finally defeat this vile female Atukam that had plagued them for so long, and give Akito peace.

 

Apep, sneering in glee at seeing two of his hated foes felled in such quick succession, made a malice-laden suggestion to his injured Queen. "Darling, I've got a splendid idea! Why don't we make this double a triple, and finish off all three Turaga Sah at once?"

 

"Agreed," replied Aso, and then she turned to face her nemesis. "And now, Khepera, the final curtain. At last, you're going to die." Before the Turaga of Insect Control, Chompshi, or Vrael could respond, the Scourge of Punt Nui had leaped forward and ensnared Khepera, tightly winding her powerful tail around him and beginning to squeeze. Chompshi and Vrael struggled to take aim at Aso, but she was keeping Khepera held in front of her, and the two Toa dared not risk hitting the Turaga. Trying to figure out what Khepera wanted them to do, Chompshi triggered his Kanohi Honiara to reach out mentally and sense what the elder was thinking. Khepera must have realized the Toa of Electricity would eventually choose such an action, and was already addressing his thoughts to him.

 

Chompshi, thought Khepera, completely calm, although sounding slightly strained. For too long Aso has been a menace to my island and its Matoran. Do not worry about striking me with your attacks I would gladly give my life so that Aso may be stopped. For Atemu's sake, Akito's sake, and my own do it.

 

Yes, Turaga, Chompshi thought, using his Kanohi to send the statement telepathically to Khepera. Then, immediately after, he sent a telepathic message to Vrael. Vrael, Khepera . . . he wants us to attack Aso. He's giving his life so we may have this chance.

 

We had better make this count, then, Vrael thought back solemnly. Remember that technique we practiced?

 

Yes, the other Toa told Vrael, before privately thinking, Mata Nui, please forgive me for what I am about to do. He raised his electrical cannon to be perfectly level with Aso's heartlight, and blasted a beam of electricity at the Atukam. Simultaneously, Vrael raised his arms and propelled his elemental power to create a massive, polygonal sphere of crystal completely surrounding Aso and Khepera. The entire telepathic conversation and the ensuing action haven taken place in an instant at the speed of thought, Aso was caught entirely unaware, and screeched in alarm, the eerie sound muted behind the thick crystal lattice.

 

Not relenting, both Toa continued to channel their elemental powers into the prison. As Vrael strengthened the crystalline structure of the matrix, Chompshi altered his electricity's trajectory slightly to hit one of the crystal faces at a perfect angle, reflecting the powerful electrical beam throughout. Aso and Khepera disappeared behind yellow radiance, as the reflected bolt grew in intensity with each reflection, searing through the crystalline structure's inhabitants. Aso's screams dwindled away, and Chompshi felt Khepera's mental presence fading away to nothing — his last feelings of contentment, despite the pain.

 

The two elder Toa were now exhausted, but they continued to summon forth all of their elemental powers into the crystal. Vrael, then Chompshi, began to feel strange tingling sensations over their bodies, like those Turaga Akito mentioned having when creating the six Toa Stones the other Toa Terra used. The sensations eventually began to fade as the Toa kept bombarding the crystal with their elemental powers. At the same time, the elemental bursts issuing from them grew weaker and weaker, eventually fading away.

 

Aso's prison drew the last of the elemental energy into itself, and the aura surrounding it also grew faint, to reveal what was still inside. The crystal chamber was now empty, other than a quantity of ash at its bottom, a cloud of green vapor, and the glowing sparks infinitely reflecting inside of it and maintaining its integrity.

 

Their grand finale finished, Chompshi and Vrael gazed up at what they had created. It was brilliant, to be sure, but there was something odd about the crystal prison . . . it seemed taller than it had been a few moments earlier. Puzzled, the two Toa looked at each other in surprise, and could not believe what they saw. For they were no longer Toa.

 

Both had shrunk in power and height, becoming Turaga. Vrael's suit of armor, made to protect his critically-weak body, had originally been bulky; but now it had streamlined to accommodate a smaller form, and was draped in robes of azure and pure white. His grapple-headed spear had become a shorter Turaga staff, and his invigorating Kanohi, the Great Nektana, had adjusted to become a more wizened Noble Mask of Life Support. Likewise, Chompshi's thunder lance was about half of its former impressive height, and his electric cannon barely fit over his left hand. He too wore stately robes, of scarlet and golden hues, and his Mask of Mind Linkage was now Noble was well. The two old friends, their powers thus spent, saw each other in their new states, and smiled.

 

The Toa Terra and Toa Septiu, having paused to watch the spectacle along with Apep, gaped in amazement and utter disbelief as they saw what had become of the two elder Toa. "Chompshi!? Vrael!?"

 

"Our mission is complete. Our destiny has been fulfilled. Call us Turaga Terra now," Chompshi said, satisfied with all that he and Vrael had accomplished.

 

Apep, however, was not satisfied. The King of the Betshu stared with hatred at the pulsating, translucent crystal chamber that had been formed around his mate. His breath came in ragged gasps, and his eyes became bloodshot. The four wings upon his back began to thrash like they had minds of their own, his tail swung back and forth dangerously, and his clawed hands closed into fists. Then, dire madness consuming his mind, he turned and roared at the fourteen Toa and two Turaga.

 

"What have you done to my Aso!? You took her from me! My better half, vanished into nothingness! Our plan was working perfectly, our triumph nearly complete! But you had to ruin it! Now I can never reclaim the ultimate power!"

 

"But," he continued, spit flying from his draconic maw, "I can still defeat you! Since you took from me the one I loved, I shall destroy you all!" And then Apep screamed, brandishing Tekhtekh high, blue energy crackling from his palms as strongly as he could muster. But the heroes were not afraid. Chompshi threw down his cannon, unable to fire any more, and he and Vrael both took up their staffs, ready to stab as a means of attack.

 

When Apep attacked the Toa again, this time Chompshi and Vrael were able to fight him as well. The two Turaga Terra were less old and more spry than Akito or Atemu, however, and so this made them all the more capable of avoiding attacks, though when they were hit they could come back with plenty of strength. Nevertheless, as the fight dragged on for several more minutes it was clear that Apep had lost something when Aso had been trapped. The Scourge of Kemet Nui was still a mighty force, but it appeared that neither he nor Tekhtekh could gain the ground they needed to reach the relic. Seeing this, the Toa Septiu of Fate decided that now would be the best opportunity to defeat Apep once and for all.

 

"This is where it will end," Ausar said. "There are fourteen of us, each with a different elemental power. You know what that means, my friends. Together, we can prevail!"

 

Matoba and the other Toa Terra nodded in understanding. So did Auset and the rest of Ausar's teammates. As Apep slowly began lunging forward, bearing down upon the heroes with the last of his strength, they held their positions and summoned their powers.

 

Tekhtekh, though, saw what was unfolding. And for the first time in its miserable existence, the Cursed Wand of Chaos was afraid.

 

This cannot be! it cried, the orb in its center dimming in dread even as it was carried toward the Toa. Sutekh, this was all a misunderstanding! Yes, a simple misunderstanding! Take me back! Use me as your weapon, I beg you! Save me!

 

"No, Tekhtekh," said the Toa of Storms stoically. "It is all over for you now. You want to rule? Then rule — in Karzahni."

 

And then the two teams of Toa, having completed the requirements necessary for their ultimate attack, unleashed every ounce of elemental energy that they had summoned. Fire, water, ice, air, earth, stone, fate, plant life, storms, sonics, gravity, and magnetism all united into a brilliant and unstoppable burst that engulfed Apep and Tekhtekh. Both the gigantic Atukam and his cowering weapon were entirely caught in the blast, and driven toward the crystalline latticework, where they were utterly immobilized even as the bloodthirsty tyrant shrieked in anger and suffering.

 

"Impossible! You cannot defeat me! I am Apep, the invincible, the immortal! King of the Betshu! Scourge of Kemet Nui! I . . . shall . . . win! I . . . shall . . ."

 

But as his wrathful utterances faded, the only voices that could be heard above the deafening hurricane of power were those of the Toa Terra and the Toa Septiu.

 

"For Mata Nui! For unity! For duty! For destiny!"

 

Then, as the Great Philae Temple grew quiet and the last of the maelstrom subsided, Chompshi, Vrael, and Aritonu saw what the Toa had done. In the great tradition of the Toa Metru and the Toa Mata, the fourteen heroes had formed an impenetrable double Toa Seal. Apep, Aso, and the Wand of Chaos were permanently trapped, silenced forever within a barrier that had frozen them in place. The curse of the Atukam had passed. Tai-Koro and Kemet Nui were saved.

 

------

 

In the center of Tai-Koro, through all the struggles of the Toa and Turaga inside the Great Philae Temple, the Matoran fighting to defend their village had persevered. With new resolve upon seeing the Punt Nui fighters arrive, as well as with the assistance of these warriors themselves, the villagers led by Turaga Pelekua and Uatchet had kept the Sebau and Samiu at bay. Though many brave Matoran's lives had been lost, this was insignificant compared to the grave losses the Betshu were suffering. Out of a force of thousands, hundreds of troglodytes had been slain in the course of the battle, lying in heaps throughout Tai-Koro.

 

But the minions of Apep, with the tenacity of swarming insects, ignored this carnage and were now finally gaining the upper hand. Still well over twelve hundred in number, they had amassed into a writhing horde that boxed in the five hundred Matoran combatants. Yet the tenacious people of Kemet Nui, not willing to lose their beloved village to the Betshu again, were doing all they could to hold off the Sebau and Samiu until the Toa had triumphed over the Atukam.

 

"Uatchet, I don't know how much longer we can take this!" Nekhebet shouted to her superior Sister, whacking a Sebau with her Chronicler's staff. "Our troops are very fatigued! Soon our defenses will collapse!"

 

"Well, if this is indeed the end, then at least we will die together," remarked Uatchet mutely. "I would not meet my maker in any other way."

 

As she and the other Sisters prepared their last defensive measures, however, a sudden blinding light erupted from the Great Philae Temple. This was followed by an unearthly scream and what sounded like a massive sonic boom, which ended as quickly as it had come. Both the Matoran and the Betshu were temporarily blinded, covering their eyes and ears in response. Yet when the former group recovered from the impact of this flash, they could not believe what they saw next.

 

The Betshu had frozen in their tracks. Every single individual had stopped fighting, instead cowering in place in abject terror. The former evil sneers on the skull-like faces of the Sebau and Samiu had been replaced by a look of primal fear. And before the very Matoran they had previously been trying to kill, they turned — and ran.

 

Never in recorded history had the minions of Apep been known to move so fast, not even when on the warpath. The Betshu completely abandoned all tasks at hand, instead scrambling as fast as they could to get away from Tai-Koro. They bypassed their dead in the streets, clambering over houses and onto the village walls. Even the recently-frozen Nak did not escape this stampede: in their mad rush to escape, the Sebau and Samiu dashed at the block that contained their twelve deceased officers, knocking it to the ground and shattering it into countless glittering shards. As the stupefied Matoran watched, they managed to scale the Tai-Koro ramparts and began jumping off en masse.

 

"Unbelievable!" Horgah whispered, jaw slack. "The Betshu . . . they're fleeing!"

 

Nor did the troglodytes stop once they had landed on the black desert soil outside the walls. As one shambling, terrified, leaderless mass, they careened madly through the sand, moving as fast as their stubby legs could carry them to flee to the safety of the Hapi River, the grassy highlands, or the sparse forest farther away from Tai-Koro. Even the Vatuka did not stop them — the giant rock Rahi howled and barked at the retreating troglodytes, but it seemed to know that the Betshu had been beaten for good. Soon no traces of Apep and Aso's forces remained, for they had all fled into the wild. The army that had plagued Kemet Nui for so long was gone, never to return.

 

For a few moments, all was silent in the village as the Matoran glanced around the empty square. Nothing remained in it except the casualties of battle and the shards of the frozen Nak. Then, the thoughts of every single warrior were echoed in Bast's single, jubilant exclamation:

 

"The Betshu have gone! We're free!"

 

Hearing this, all the Matoran burst into cheers and applause. Uatchet, Nekhebet, Sekhet, and the rest of the Sisters of Het-hert embraced in triumph. Whetar and his warriors clanked fists and gave each other high-fives. Bast tackled Wild Fang Tooth out of pure joy, and the two beings rolled along the ground happily while Ohee and Shemsu voiced their approvals too. After thousands of years of waiting for deliverance, and so much having been lost, it was a momentous occasion for everyone to see the Atukam finally vanquished.

 

Only Turaga Pelekua remained solemn and not rejoicing. Instead he walked over to the open doorway of the Great Philae Temple and sighed. Soon the laughter and cheering died down as the Matoran crowd saw what he was doing. Pelekua slowly raised his hand and pointed toward the interior of the holy place, saying just one word. "Look." Then the Matoran's smiles turned to faces of sadness, their tears of joy into tears of grief, as they witnessed the true toll that the battle had taken.

 

Inside the holy sanctuary, the afternoon light filtered through the great stained glass windows, illuminating a stark and heart-wrenching scene within. Turaga Atemu and Turaga Akito lay prone on the floor, next to one another, and not too far away from the prison that contained Apep, Tekhtekh, and Aso. The Toa Septiu and Turaga Aritonu knelt next to the elder of Kemet Nui, while the Toa Terra, Chompshi, and Vrael were on their knees by the side of their island's leader. The third Turaga Sah was nowhere to be seen.

 

"Turaga Atemu, can you hear me?" Ausar asked, setting down his Kepesh and putting a hand on the Turaga of Plasma's cheek. "We did it! We defeated Apep — and Aso."

 

"Then it is done," said Atemu. He did his best to sit up, looking at the Toa Septiu, and his battle-scarred, craggy face seemed very tired. "I am at peace."

 

"Don't worry, Turaga Atemu," Anpu said, preparing to activate the healing properties of his Kanohi Senb. "You'll be all right. Everything is going to be okay."

 

"Indeed it will be, Anpu," Atemu replied, painfully managing a small grin, "but not for me." And then he motioned to the Turaga of Sonics next to him. "Aritonu?"

 

"Yes, my friend?" enquired the other elder.

 

"Take good care of Tai-Koro," croaked Atemu. "Lead it alongside Pelekua and rebuild Manu. I know you will do well. After all, you helped train the finest six Toa that I have ever known. They will be there to protect you."

 

"Don't say things like that, Turaga!" Auset cried, on the verge of tears. "We have to save you!"

 

"You already have, my daughter," Atemu reassured her. "You did what my team never could —  defeat Apep and Aso forever. Go forth, and bring peace to this dome. My sun is setting, but yours has only just begun to rise. Now it is your time." His eyes grew misty, and he seemed distant. "I will be with Mata Nui now."

 

That said, the Turaga Sah of Plasma gently laid his head back on the smooth stones. His eyes closed, his heartlight dimmed, and the grip on his Superthermal Sickle slackened. Before the Toa Septiu could do anything to help him, Atemu breathed his last, and lay still.

 

Anpu moved his hands, still glowing with the healing effects of his Kanohi, away from the Turaga. "His wounds were too great. I did my best."

 

Ausar nodded, holding onto Auset as the Toa Septiu of Plant Life sobbed against his chest. Heru and Nebt-het sat together, arms on each other's shoulders in sadness. Even Sutekh knelt in stunned silence, unable to believe that his leader was gone. But Atemu had not died in vain. Tekhtekh, and all its evil, had been stopped.

 

Nearby, the Toa and Turaga Terra sat around the fallen Akito. Moments after Atemu's passing, the Turaga of Magma glanced up at his friends. "Did we win?" he asked wearily.

 

"We won," Chompshi said assuredly. "Khepera gave his life so that Aso could be trapped. And Vrael and I gave up our powers so that she would remain there, permanently."

 

"I see that I have left Terra-Koro in the best of hands," Akito responded. He heaved a sigh of relief, as pleased as Atemu had been at the turn of events. But then the elder of Terra Nui pulled himself up partway, and addressed the grieving Toa Septiu of Storms nearby. "Pardon me, Sutekh?"

 

"Turaga Akito?" asked Sutekh quizzically. "You wish to speak with me?"

 

"Yes, I do. I am glad that Tekhtekh was neutralized, but the fact remains that you now have no weapon. That is why I want you to have this." And from his side, he pulled up his laser crossbow.

 

"Your old weapon! Oh, no, I couldn't!"

 

"Take it, Sutekh," Akito said. "I have no use for it any more. Use it, and keep it always as a token of the great victory we had today."

 

Sutekh gingerly took the crossbow into his hands. He hefted the weapon, and it felt good in his arms. Then, without warning, he cocked it, to the surprise of everyone around him. "I will cherish it always," vowed the Toa of Storms, suddenly feeling happier than he ever had before.

 

"But we need you, Turaga," Matoba told the Terra Nui elder. "None of us could go on without your guidance."

 

"My work here is done," came the reply. "All I have taught has been passed on to you. You are the true heroes. Your legends will be told by generations to come." And then the Turaga of Magma looked away from the Toa, his telescopic eye unfocused, as if he saw figures not currently present. "Is that you, Atemu?" he whispered. "Oh, I'll be there to join you and Khepera shortly. And Hakeahu! How good to see you again!"

 

"Please don't go, Turaga Akito!" urged Heaka. "Don't leave us!"

 

Akito looked at his eight pupils assembled around him, and for the first time he appeared truly sad. But despite his pain, his face was calm and serene. "It is the way of the world. Our lives are finite; we must do with them what we can. I go to a happier place, to be with those that I love. Do not despair, my friends, for mine is a peaceful rest."

 

Then he laid back as Atemu had, and was motionless. His heartlight faded, he let go of his fire staff, and he breathed a gentle sigh. As the Toa and Turaga Terra burst into unrestrained weeping, his eyes closed forever. The Matoran in the Kemet Nui square cried too, along with the two teams of Toa and the four Turaga. All mourned, for on this day they had won their greatest battle, but lost their greatest elders.

 

Thus too did Akito, Turaga of Terra Nui, die.

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

  • 4 months later...

Chapter 27

 

As they viewed the retreating silver form of the Quntaino leader, whose six brothers soon started to follow in their exodus from Terra-Koro, the remaining five Sharaku were restored to movement, shaking off the trance the radiant light of the Zlinj had left them in. Although they stood only a few bio from where Hanak and Argentaros had witnessed their visions, the defenders of Terra Nui were now separated from their crimson-armored comrade by a huge mental gulf. Grasping this, Zanta stepped closer to Hanak, who was standing motionless, gaze downcast, lost in his own thoughts.

 

"Hanak, what visions did you see in the mask?" he asked, recognizing from the change in Hanak's composure that the Kanohi must have imparted some sort of revelation to the Sharaku of Fire.

 

"I saw everything the mask has seen, and all of Argentaros's memories," he replied quietly. "Zanta, he — they, they're not —," Hanak trailed off, searching for the right word.

 

"Not what?" Zanta asked impatiently.

 

"Not . . . evil. Not by any definition we use. I saw him and the Quntaino resting with other Rahi, even hatchlings and young ones . . . as one of them, calm, at peace . . ." The Sharaku struggled to properly convey the impossible images he had viewed. As he did, the remaining members of his team had moved closer.

 

"Haven't the Quntaino influenced the minds of Rahi before?" Vukaz inquired, gesturing to the idling Visorak and other inhabitants of the Johmai Jungle for emphasis. "That doesn't necessarily prove anything."

 

"You don't understand," Hanak said urgently. "I saw this with my own eyes. I felt Argentaros's emotions as my own. It was — is — genuine.”

 

The Green One, who had also drawn near, nodded. "I too guessed at dis."

 

"In any case, we still have to stop the Quntaino. Loving Rahi or not, they still must not destroy the Zlinj," Reika pointed out.

 

"Yes," Hanak sighed, "but we can't fight them physically. Even when I tried my hardest against Argentaros, I still failed — and after our first fight and what I've seen I wouldn't have the will to try again."

 

"Then what shall we do?" wondered Thukor. As one, the six gathered leaders of Terra Nui looked to Hanak for the answer.

 

The Sharaku leader took a deep breath, and raised his gaze to the horizon of the Terra Nui plains, where the departing figures of the Quntaino could barely be seen in the glare of the lowering suns. Reflecting their brightness, Hanak's green eyes shone with enormous resolve.

 

"We will use the only weapon we have left: words. And we must not fail in using them."

 

------

 

In a breath of moving air and a rustle of dry grass the seven beings materialized before the marching Quntaino, borne on Zanta's powers of teleportation. Most of the lesser Quntaino were visibly startled, moving closer to their leader to offer protection, as Daigolva even drew one of his broadswords and Predacron brandished his blade-tipped arms. Argentaros, however, merely blinked, unsurprised.

 

Taking advantage of the Quntaino's silence, Hanak quickly began to speak. "Argentaros, you must not do this!" he blurted out. "Give us a chance to convince you of the consequences of what you intend to do!"

 

The alpha Quntaino regarded Hanak with an inscrutable emotion. "Less than a cycle of the sun ago I would have denied you audience. But, in light of your memories, which reveal you to be of nobler character than I surmised, I will allow it," Argentaros growled, waving a clawed arm slightly at Daigolva and Predacron, who obediently put down their weapons. "Speak, Hanak."

 

Hanak took a deep breath. "For almost fifty thousand years, the Zlinj has been on this island, first as a symbol of the bond between Terra Nui and Kemet Nui, but quickly becoming a symbol of peace for the Matoran and every other being on this isle. In the many millennia in which it rested upon the face of the statue of Mata Nui, which all revere, it reassured all Matoran that, should enough danger loom, its power could always be used to repel that danger and restore calm to this peaceful island. It is a symbol of the blessings of fertility Mata Nui gave Terra Nui, and many other things. Even the Rahi rally behind it, as happened when the Kanohi was used most — in repelling the foreign fleet of the Dark Lord on his mission of conquest."

 

"In destroying the mask, you rob Terra Nui of its ability to protect itself, its pride, its strength. You have seen my memories — look at what the Dark Lord had done to Shakaz, my former home, and the former home of my five friends. The people crushed before a sadistic, violent, unpredictable leader, taking advantage of them in every way possible, making some his dark servants. Had the Zlinj not been present, all Matoran and, yes, all Rahi on Terra Nui would have been the Dark Lord's slaves. If not for the pride of the Matoran, relent for the sake of your beloved Rahi, and your island itself, I beg you," Hanak pleaded. As he paused, his companions listened breathlessly, silently praying his supplication would affect the impassive alpha Quntaino.

 

Argentaros nodded his silver head. "You have great courage and humility to speak thus, and your plea comes from the heart. Nevertheless, you are wrong. You speak of the Zlinj reassuring the Matoran should danger appear. Yet, in all of the years, the greatest danger that has appeared, and the only danger for which use of the Zlinj was necessary was a threat which the mask created. The Dark Lord was drawn here out of a desire for the mask, and would have killed and subjugated our island only to acquire it himself. In destroying the Zlinj my brothers and I will forever put Terra Nui beyond the desires of tyrants and would-be conquerors!" he rumbled, raising a clawed fist for emphasis.

 

"You claimed the Rahi rallied around the Kanohi. Did you not realize that the Zlinj, Mask of Nature, commands the control of all Rahi and plant life in its use? Even as it delivered the Matoran from bondage, it thrusted Rahi into it, forcing their lives to be given to protect those of your villagers, the Matoran. You invoke your memories of suffering in Shakaz. But even then you had free will, to resist in any way you can, which eventually earned you freedom. In the Zlinj's thrall no being can escape its mental bonds," Argentaros barked, his voice rising in emotion as he spoke.

 

"And are these Matoran more fit to be stewards of Terra Nui than the natural inhabitants, my brothers, the Rahi of all build that walk, crawl, swim, fly or otherwise move within this dome? Do my brothers of the earth cut out pieces of its heart to create their homes? Do they cut down trees in the jungle which have stood longer than any Matoran settlement? Do they take these things and trade them away as trinkets? No, I will not permit the Matoran possession of the Zlinj. It must be destroyed! Do not delude yourself in thinking you may speak for Terra Nui. My brothers and I represent the will of the island — we are Terra Nui!" Argentaros roared.

 

The Green One broke in, unfazed by the anger of the alpha Quntaino. "Da Matorans don't want to hurt da Rahi. Even when fighting da Dark Lord's forces deys onwy used it as last wesort. And da Rahi would have helped regardwess, to pwotect deir home," pointed out the diminutive figure, ignoring the indictments of Matoran trade.

 

"And you forget that the Zlinj is not in Matoran hands," Zanta added, "it's in the maw of a giant Collosorahk, from which no Matoran can retrieve it. I doubt even us Sharaku could get it without dying in the process. I assume you intend to attempt summoning Shredder in some manner to destroy it, but in terms of Matoran reaching the mask, it's as good as destroyed."

 

By some influence, Argentaros had largely succeeded in calming himself. "Let the Rahi help of their volition, then, in any future conflict. And, Sharaku, there exist possibilities that eventually the Zlinj may be retrieved — that a Matatu wearer might pull it forth, a being of Rahi control might convince the Collosorahk to release it, or even that it might eventually dislodge itself and be freed into the earth." He shook his head, a gesture which the other Quntaino all emulated, one by one.

 

"My brothers and I do not have much time left," Argentaros remarked ambiguously. "However," he began haltingly, "however, there is a small chance for compromise. I admit there is some good in the Matoran tribe here . . . more than I gave credit for in my anger . . ." Once more the Quntaino trailed off, his pride preventing him from admitting any more. But the look in his eyes revealed the depth of his unspoken contrition.

 

This is the Argentaros that I saw resting with the Rahi, thought Hanak in wonder.

 

Argentaros then decisively made up his mind, and raised his eyes to look at each of the assembled inhabitants of Terra Nui in turn. "In what I and my brothers are about to do, do not distract us. To do so would kill us all," he said solemnly. "Now stand behind us."

 

The group quickly acceded to his command, as the rest of the Quntaino assembled behind their leader in a semicircle. This done, they collectively closed their eyes and calmed their breathing. Argentaros slowly spread out his mental awareness to every Rahi on Terra Nui, until he found the one mind he was looking for — the ancient, slumbering mind of Shredder, who lay curled up basking deep beneath the sands of the Pehku Desert. Cautiously, Argentaros approached the mind of the Collosorahk, gently waking the worm with a mental touch.

 

Responding sluggishly, Shredder slowly unwound his massive serpentine body and swam toward the location of the curious mental summons. With his approach, the ground quaked, until the giant, round head burst to the surface, emerging ten bio in front of Argentaros's feet. Shredder's bullet-shaped head, once brilliant emerald, had faded to a dull green with age, yet the immense Collosorahk was still a majestic sight. Only the combined mental efforts of all seven Quntaino kept him pacified, and prevented his devouring all before him.

 

Then, almost recognizing the awe in the small beings before him, Shredder yawned, opening his huge maw to its fullest, into a spreading lotus of crystalline teeth which spread nearly ten bio in diameter, large enough to engulf the whole group. Sand and churned soil pouring from the gaps in his folded skin, a familiar crimson and jet black Kanohi could just barely be glimpsed in the depths of his throat, caught between two sturdy fangs.

 

Satisfied that his quarry was indeed present, and also in awe at the ancient presence before him, Argentaros smoothly fell to one knee and bowed before the oldest living inhabitant of Terra Nui.

 

"And there it is . . ." he murmured, as several of the Sharaku behind him intook breath sharply. "Now, my lord, if you would permit me?"

 

At the telepathic influence of the Quntaino, Shredder exhaled deeply, expelling the rest of the earth from his maw with a burning breath, then opened his mouth to its absolute fullest, stretching his flexible skin to create a portal fifteen bio in diameter. Finally, he relaxed the great muscles in his body, his mouth coming down to rest on flattened prairie grass, and the hundreds of razor fangs flatting themselves against his skin in repose. His thin garnets of eyes, beneath rocky brows, regarded Argentaros with sentient curiosity.

 

The alpha Quntaino smoothly rose, brushing the blown sand from his silver coat, then released his living whiplash curled around his arm. The snakelike creature fell to the ground, and quickly slithered away. Argentaros then took sure steps into the gaping mouth. Quickly reaching the rear, he crouched, and rested his clawed paws on the true Kanohi Zlinj, and gazed into its depths for a moment. The molten currents running beneath the mask reflected brightly in his ruby eyes, which grew wide in triumph. Then, he gripped the Mask of Nature and partially rotated it, so it stood perfectly upright between the top teeth clenching it. Removing his hands from the mask, Argentaros lowered his gaze, and then sighed softly. He subsequently turned, rose to his full formidable height, and became the first living thing to return from the mouth of Shredder.

 

Taking the place which he held moments ago, he delivered a last mental command to his brothers. Amid puzzled stares from the Sharaku and a knowing smile from the Green One, the seven Quntaino raised their arms as one. Pure power flowed in currents from their arms into Shredder, glowing in white light. The cascade of energy engulfed the Collosorahk, flowing over his whole girth. The timeworn skin became restored to a shining emerald, fire returned to the slits of eyes, and the Zlinj became an extension of its holder. The currents of molten magma within the mask fused with Shredder's blood vessels, flowing through the breadth of his colossal length. Edges of the Kanohi blended into the throat, the two fangs that gripped it tightly clasping near its eyeholes. The Kanohi Zlinj, before the thunderstruck eyes of the onlookers, was rendered from a Great Mask into a Legendary Mask, permanently affixed to its guardian. And Shredder, in receiving this gift, felt his lifeforce increase without bound, growing to be immortal in the nexus of power.

 

But for the Quntaino, imparting this came at a great cost — their own lifeforce. As the energy flowed from the six lesser Quntaino, their images faded, until they became little more than spangled outlines. When the final burst of power left them, they vanished entirely, out of the realm of the living. Only Argentaros remained, to see Shredder, now unable to be affected by any mental control, slide back into the living earth from whence he came. The sole Quntaino was deathly pale, his silver fur having become bleached white. Attempting to turn to look upon the Sharaku, he collapsed languidly, falling into Hanak's arms as the Sharaku swiftly caught the pallid alpha Quntaino. As the other six rushed to cluster around him, he turned his attention only to the Green One.

 

"Do not let the Matoran ever forget," he rasped quietly. And then the last breath escaped Argentaros's lungs, and he fell back, his ruby, crystal eyes losing their inner flame in death.

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 28

 

The day following the great Battle of Tai-Koro on Kemet Nui, a somber ceremony took place behind the Great Philae Temple.

 

Regarding the ancient place of worship itself, the Sisterhood of Het-hert had officially taken a respite from their studious contemplation of the universe and had re-installed the massive doors, with the help of the other Matoran. These huge slabs, having been tossed aside by Apep as if they were chaff, were now back in place. Nor would they ever need be locked again, for with the Betshu gone forever the citizens of Tai-Koro would not have to worry about sealing themselves inside the temple's sanctuary. All of Tai-Koro would be their sanctuary now.

 

Furthermore, with the specters of the trapped and vanquished Atukam standing ominously inside the main foyer of the Great Philae, Uatchet and Nekhebet decided that they would not conduct a formal memorial service inside their convent. To do so, to lay Atemu, Akito, and Pelekua to rest in the spots where they fell, would dishonor their memory, according to the sagacious Sister Superior. Instead, the Matoran, Toa, and remaining Turaga chose to honor their fallen leaders in the simple Matoran cemetery behind the Temple, in a quiet part of Tai-Koro.

 

This was a place with a long history behind it. Compared to the much-smaller Terra Nui burial ground, it was where many Matoran had been interred over the protracted course of the Betshu wars, and it had been established almost as long ago as the Temple itself, having been created by the Toa Sah to shelter their fallen friends on the island they had helped liberate. Here too lay entombed many respectable, eminent figures in Kemet Nui's history: the famous and prosperous blacksmith Tukua, whose physical appearance had echoed the legendary hero Takua of old; and the distinguished Re-Stau mining operator Qemau, who had been Aritonu and Nebt-het's work boss in ancient days of yore. It would be a fitting spot, thought Uatchet, for the rememberance of the greatest of the Toa Sah.

 

Everyone in the village had been gathered. Uatchet and Nekhebet stood at the head of the Sisters of Het-hert, with Bast, Sekhet, Heqet, Renpit, and Thenenet behind them. In times of peace the Sisters assembled as a choir, and so on this day, before all those present, they said their final words to the Turaga, and sang a somber tune from Metru Nui to commemorate the heroic deeds of the three Toa Sah's lifetimes. Pelekua had been especially moved; for he remembered how Inami, the female Toa Sah of Water, would periodically start up a ballad with her melodious singing voice so that her team's spirits might be calmed; and how Orani, the Toa Sah of Lightning, would accompany her sister by strumming on her own fine harp. The haunting, yet noble, vocals of the Sisterhood's concerto brought wonderful memories back to the Turaga of Rahi, and he realized just how much he missed Akito and Atemu.

 

Elsewhere, the two Av-Matoran guards, Meti and Shna, flanked the Sisters, surrounded by their brigade of Temple protectors. The twin white warriors had partially covered their faces with their ceremonial garb, so that others might not see their woeful expressions. The rest of the population of Tai-Koro clustered around the Sisters and Av-Matoran, and though there was standing room only all could clearly see the place where the Turaga's gravestones lay. In front of the memorial markers were Turaga Aritonu and Turaga Pelekua, while the six Toa Terra, two Turaga Terra, and six Toa Septiu all formed clusters, united by team, around the elders.

 

The gravestones for the Turaga Sah were nothing special. They had been hewn by Pacha and Nuukor that morning, and carved in plain Matoran script to contain all the essential information that a passerby might need: the names of the three individuals, the day they were each born and the day when they had died, and a brief summary of the things accomplished by each as a Toa Sah. Only one had a body beneath it: Atemu had been placed in a wooden casket in the earth under his marker. Akito's remains were also in a coffin, but the Toa and Turaga Terra had expressed a desire that he be returned to Terra Nui, to be entombed on the island he loved and had called home. This Aritonu had respectfully agreed with, as had Pelekua. Finally, since Khepera's frame had been reduced to ashes by the attack that had killed him and imprisoned Aso, he and Akito had their headstones placed in their respective spots merely as symbols. But, most importantly, any Matoran who paid heed to the site would remember all three Turaga Sah.

 

As the Sisters concluded their beautiful requiem, Pelekua stepped forward. As the last Turaga Sah living, to his knowledge, it was only proper that he say the first goodbye to his fallen teammates. Clearing his throat, he gazed down at the tombs, and slowly began to speak.

 

"Well, Akito, Atemu, and Khepera, here we are at last. You always did tell me that we would live to see Apep and Aso fall, and it appears that you were correct. I myself did not always have that faith; for I was imprisoned beneath Kemet Nui for who knows how long, with no apparent chance of escape. You too, Khepera, must have known what that was like, trapped in the Mokhugra or wherever that is while Aso reigned on Punt Nui. But then I was freed, by two teams of Toa whose plan you had orchestrated. And for a few wonderful days — be it as they may have been filled with anticipation and dread of what was inevitably to come — I was joyfully happy, for I was able to converse with you and spend time with you before your untimely ends."

 

"For this I am glad. There was a reason, I think, why we chose you as leader way back on Metru Nui, Atemu. You were always the wisest one, the one who came up with the best plans, who lead our team through Karzahni and back, and would never give in in the darkest hour, not when all of our lives were at stake. And Akito, you made a fitting deputy for the Toa Sah; and as Atemu's best friend among all of us, there was no better choice for the job. Most empathetic, most compassionate, and most level-headed, you could always settle our disputes. Finally, Khepera, I am sorry that I could only see your face one last time before you turned to dust. But let me say that as a Toa, your strength and your fortitude were unmatched. Fare well, brave souls, the greatest of the Toa Sah. May you reach safe havens, my friends."

 

His speech then finished, Pelekua moved away from the graves and Aritonu took his place.

 

"I am afraid," the Turaga of Power Scream said sadly, "that I did not know all of you as well as I would have liked. Akito, I had long heard of who you were, a great and noble Turaga who presided over the neighboring dome of Terra Nui, safeguarding the Mask of Nature. But know this: I still greatly respect you, based on what I saw in the struggle against Apep and Aso, and am saddened that you are no longer here with us."

 

"Khepera, you I did know well, at least for a little while. Freeing you from Kush Nui was one of the hardest and most backbreaking ordeals of my life, one the likes of which I shall not attempt again, for fear that it will kill me. But in helping you to escape, I grew to greatly appreciate your intelligence, your sense of humor, and your indomitable will. Though your death was tragic, albeit necessary to defeat Aso, I feel that it was a fitting end for a hero such as yourself, and I'm sure you will agree with me. Rotting in a lightless prison for eternity is an ignoble fate compared to your glorious final triumph."

 

"As for you, Atemu, truly I can say that you were the best friend I ever had. Your wise ways of leadership, beloved by all Matoran of Kemet Nui, will now serve me well as I assume the mantle of elder here. Even when I was a lowly Um-Matoran, you were a mentor of mine, always offering kind advice and heartfelt support. You did not deserve to die, slain by Tekhtekh's bolt. But I will hold you always in my heart, and your wisdom shall continue to be remembered through the ages. Your legend shall live forever."

 

Then, overcome by emotion, Aritonu bowed his head and hobbled over to the Toa Septiu, where he was embraced by a sorrowful Nebt-het. Chompshi and Vrael, the newest Turaga, were the next to address the fallen Turaga Sah.

 

For a few moments, Chompshi paused, taking some time to collect his thoughts. Were any being in the vicinity to possess a Honiara other than him, they could have linked to his mind and discovered a whirling vortex in his brain as he debated what to say. The Turaga of Electricity had always been a good public speaker, always speaking his mind with stentorian determination. Now, however, his voice was quiet.

 

"Turaga Akito," Chompshi said, "we here on Kemet Nui, and everyone at home on Terra Nui, were graced by your presence. In everything you did, you did it with love. For your love of adventure, the eight of us Toa Terra accompanied you on a journey unlike anything we've ever experienced before, or ever will since. For your love of our island, you gave Vrael and me the power to become Toa, to calm the Matoran's spirits and restore peaceful calm to our home. And for the love of Matorankind everywhere, you gave up your life, so that evil might die, and freedom might return."

 

"It takes an uncommon mind to accomplish extraordinary things like those you achieved," Vrael spoke up, next to Chompshi. "You had that, as anyone who has seen your Zalmex at work can testify. And yet you also had faith, faith in the good of the world. When I was in a deep coma following my defeat at the hands of Zakarath, when my life was on the line and only Chompshi's handiwork could save me, you believed that I would live. What's more, you believed that I would return to being a strong Toa, and that I would help to defeat the monster who had wounded me thus. And in our darkest hour, when twice Terra Nui was attacked by the drone army, you believed that against all odds, we could win. And we did."

 

"You gave Vrael and I the courage to be the Toa we were," sighed Chompshi. "You were always at our side in times of trouble. Without you, we couldn't have defeated Ballom. But you also helped us to overcome our own inner demons. For that, I thank you. Rest in peace with Hakeahu, Turaga Akito, in the glory of Mata Nui. Be free, with your true friends Atemu and Khepera, who were just as brave and as wise as you, and who with you can now finally rejoice in your victory."

 

"We will remember you always," Vrael concluded. Then he put his arm around Chompshi, and Chompshi put his arm around Vrael, and together the two old pals returned to their places by the Toa Terra.

 

Now, with the elders having said their words of remembrance, the six Toa Septiu and the six Toa Terra spoke to the spirits of the departed Turaga Sah in turn. And then all of the Matoran of Kemet Nui bid their leaders farewell, from the ever-silent Uatchet who signed her goodbye, all the way down to the young Bast, who was for once relatively subdued. Finally, once everything had been said, the crowd of villagers dispersed from the graveyard, and returned to their homes from whence they had come.

 

As the Toa Septiu walked through the main square of Tai-Koro, Ausar looked at two of his teammates with remorse. "Heru, Nebt-het, I can't begin to tell you how sorry I am that your vehicles were destroyed. Not only were the Xcavator and Stryda instrumental to our triumph, I know that you really liked them. It seemed that they were almost made for you, but the Betshu tore them to shreds. I am sorry."

 

"That's okay, Ausar," Nebt-het said reassuringly. "What matters is not that they were destroyed, but that all of us survived. I would rather be with you five now than with only the Stryda. Even Lyse, who was just as attached to that hunk of junk as I was, seems to have gotten over its loss. They were only vehicles, after all."

 

"Yeah, and besides, we weren't the ones who needed a new lease on life anyway," added Heru, pointing at Sutekh, who was carrying his new laser crossbow with joyful pride. "You were the one who deserved something new, Sutekh. Take good care of it."

 

"Oh, I will," said the Toa of Storms. "I will indeed. Thanks, everyone. Forget Tekhtekh; I know who my real friends are, and they're all around me."

 

Ausar then pointed his Kepesh at the village wall. "Now, then, there's one last loose end to wrap up." Leading his team to the parapet, the Toa of Fate made a quick whistle. In response, the massive, rocky form of the Vatuka trotted into view, ambling over to where the Toa Septiu were and sitting on its haunches expectantly.

 

Bending down so that he could touch the top of the Vatuka's head, Ausar stroked the giant Rahi's snout. "My friend, it is time for us to part ways. You were an invaluable asset, in all of our campaigns. We couldn't have liberated the Matoran or freed Tai-Koro without you. But now we have won, and the Betshu are gone forever. Therefore, I release you from your bondage. Return to the wild. Be free."

 

The Vatuka gave a low moan, looking up at its former ally woefully. Yet Ausar's face remained serene, as he gently waved his hand in the direction of the desert beyond Tai-Koro. Seeing this, the Vatuka made up its mind. Giving one last roar as tribute to the good times it had experienced, the creature slowly turned away from the village, and lumbered off into the wilds of Kemet Nui.

 

Watching it proceed, Anpu could not help but wonder where the Rahi would go. "Do you think it's going to start another epoch of hibernation?" he asked.

 

"Who knows?" Auset answered, smiling at Ausar warmly. "The Vatuka has its own destiny ahead of it. And so do we."

 

"Oh yes," replied Ausar with a grin, as he and his team clambered down the village wall and headed back into Tai-Koro. "We have a long and fruitful career ahead of us. The defeat of the Betshu was far from an end to our exploits. It was just the beginning."

 

------

 

And so, the adventure of the champions of Terra Nui, which had started out as a simple voyage and became the journey of a lifetime, came to an end.

 

It turned out that Turaga Aritonu, upon traveling to Kush Nui in his swift vessel to free the trapped Khepera, had suspected all along that his friends back home on Kemet Nui might be in trouble while he was gone. Thus when he and Khepera had escaped Kush Nui, he had entreated the Turaga of Insects to stop at Punt Nui, to get some reinforcements by which they could support the fighters on Kemet Nui. Khepera, who had not seen his home island in millennia, ardently agreed.

 

So the two of them had returned to Pe-Koro, where Khepera was welcomed back with open arms by his people, and Aritonu was hailed as a hero by the Pe-Matoran. There Senko, overjoyed to see his counselor again, had told the two Turaga of all that had befallen Punt Nui in Khepera's absence, ranging from the despotic reign of Aso to the fall of the Vorukan and the destruction of the Betshu Queen's Citadel at the hands of the Toa Terra. He also had informed them of how Akito's company had crash-landed on Punt Nui, and how the villagers of Pe-Koro had built them a raft by which to reach Kemet Nui. Here again did Aritonu have great foresight, for in the fortnight that he and Khepera stayed, he ordered the diligent builders Jahpex and Neesau to construct another raft, which the Toa Terra could then use to sail home should they be stranded on Kemet Nui. The Pe-Matoran had dutifully complied, and so Whetar and his warrior legion were pleased to bestow upon Chompshi and Vrael the second raft.

 

Now, with a generous supply of food and water prepared, and Akito's map at the ready for guidance on the passage back to Terra Nui, the Toa Terra were making the final preparations to their long voyage home. Matoba and his five teammates carried the barrels and crates of provisions onto the raft, while Reda, Taiki, and other Punt Nui soldiers held it steady on the shore of the Hapi River. Whetar, who had just returned from helping to re-stock Aritonu's ship moored nearby, was yelling out instructions to his crew.

 

Chompshi, who was out on a stroll with Vrael to see how progress was going, approached the Ta-Matoran Guard Captain amiably. "Well, Whetar, you and your comrades seem to be doing a fine job. Thank you for bringing this new craft to Kemet Nui for us; we shall make good use of it on the way back to Terra Nui. Oh, and thanks for helping out in the battle there as well."

 

"Oh, it was no trouble at all," Whetar remarked with gusto, shaking Chompshi's outstretched hand.

 

"Vrael and I will miss you and all the other Pe-Matoran, you know. So will Matoba, Heaka, and the other Toa Terra. We'll be sure to tell the villagers of Terra-Koro all about you."

 

"Aye, sir," nodded Whetar. "But begging your pardon, Elder Vrael here won't be seeing the last of me or my mates any time soon."

 

"Huh?" Chompshi turned to Vrael, who was doing his best to look preoccupied and not face Chompshi directly. "What's he talking about, Vrael?"

 

The Turaga of Crystal, finally summoning the inner strength he needed to give the painful announcement, looked at his best friend with a bittersweet expression. "Chompshi . . . there's something I need to tell you. Something I should have said, to everyone, a long time ago. You see . . . I won't be going back with you to Terra Nui."

 

Chompshi could not believe what he just heard. The six Toa Terra, who had been listening to the whole conversation, had paused in their work on the raft, and were not clustered around Chompshi. They too looked at Vrael with alarm.

 

After a few moments, Chompshi recovered from the shock. His countenance a mixture of wonder and disbelief, he asked a single question in response.

 

"But why?"

 

Vrael swallowed, and then continued. "The decision I have made was by no means an easy one to reach. When we were on Punt Nui, I often found myself admiring the stark rugged beauty of the island; and in Pe-Koro, I was astounded by the tenacity and sheer friendliness of the Matoran. I may not have shown these feelings to you, but they were there. Though Terra Nui is my home, I found myself drawn to Punt Nui in ways that I cannot explain. And surely you can understand the plight of its people. There they were, left to their own devices for thousands of years, having to defend their homes from a ruthless Betshu force, without the guidance of their beloved Turaga. When he did return, for a brief shining moment, he was soon gone, and he will not come back to Punt Nui. Simply put, they are now without a leader, someone who can guide them into a new age of peace. That is why, after the funeral, I talked to Whetar. He and Turaga Aritonu have agreed to give me passage to Punt Nui along with the Pe-Matoran fighters. There I will stay, to live out my life as the leader of Pe-Koro."

 

"Do not believe that this is because I do not care for you," Vrael said, his voice filled with sorrow as much as it was filled with resolve. "I care deeply for all seven of you and for all of my friends and loved ones on Terra Nui. Yet this is what I feel is right. In fact, I feel that this is what I was destined to do. Almost as if Mata Nui somehow had a hand in our crashing on Punt Nui. As if he wanted me to see a village in need, and realize that that is where I need to be. You can understand that, can't you?"

 

"Truth be told, we Punt Nui folks can't think of anyone better for the job," Whetar added, clapping the Turaga of Crystal on the back.

 

Chompshi, having taken in all this, smiled in understanding. He looked at the Toa Terra, who gave him the same smile. Then he stepped forward, putting his creased hands on Vrael's shoulders, and looked his lifelong companion straight in the eyes.

 

"Vrael, is this truly what you desire? To lead on Punt Nui, to be its Turaga?"

 

"Yes. More than anything else I have ever wanted."

 

"Then go. Be happy," Chompshi declared, embracing Vrael in a mighty hug. "Whether you stay with us or leave, I will always stand by your decision. You are my best friend; it's my job."

 

"Chompshi," said Vrael with equal pleasure. "I could not agree more. Together, we have always weathered life's storms. You've been a brother to me, and more than that. It brings me great sorrow to leave you and Terra Nui behind. Without you, a part of me would be missing. But I will not be without you. You will live on in my memories, of the good times we had together, and I will cherish our friendship. Wherever you are, wherever you go, you will always be with me. And I will always be with you."

 

"Goodbye, Vrael," Matoba said, speaking for the six Toa Terra as the team bid the Turaga of Crystal farewell. "May you find peace and happiness on Punt Nui."

 

"And may you keep the peace on Terra Nui," Vrael told them.

 

"Do you think we'll ever meet again?" Heaka asked. "I mean, in order to protect the finality of the Toa Seal, all twelve of the Toa who created it should not be in the same place at the same time. That means that we can't return to Kemet Nui if the Toa Septiu are there. So must we all part ways?"

 

"I see no reason for that," Vrael replied. "Sure, we can't all meet on Kemet Nui, but that doesn't mean we all can't reunite somewhere else. Somewhere like Punt Nui, we would all be together, but far enough away from the Atukam's prisons. Rest assured, I am certain that someday we shall see each other again."

 

Chompshi, thus satisfied, held out his fist to his friend. "Then have a good life, most fearless of the Toa Terra."

 

"And you as well, most judicious of the Toa Terra." And then Vrael slammed his fist into Chompshi's.

 

------

 

Once both seafaring vessels — Aritonu's ship and the Toa Terra's raft — had been fully loaded, Turaga Pelekua and the Matoran of Kemet Nui accompanied them down the Hapi River. From Tai-Koro the procession followed the river through the plains and the badlands, past the now-abandoned Dahkla Oasis, and then finally to the sea. Here, on the southern shore of the island, the ship and the raft would stay together for a while, before finally going their separate ways. Aritonu and Vrael would stop on Punt Nui, while the Toa Terra and Chompshi would continue on past the small island and enter the network of tunnels that led all the way back to Terra Nui. It was a long journey for the Turaga Terra and his six pupils, but Pacha was hopeful that they would encounter good weather. The season of storms was past, and with Apep and Aso gone, nothing foreboding would hang over the group. Everything would be calm.

 

As the villagers assembled on the black sand beach where the Hakeahu II had first landed on Kemet Nui, it seemed as though everything had changed from that fateful day many weeks ago. Now, as the afternoon sun sank in the sky, life had returned to the shore. Nui-Bauk cried mournfully as they flew through the sky, while an Ohee frolicked in the shallows and Kofo-Kopen buzzed around the sand dunes. Once more, Kemet Nui was whole, and it made a fitting setting as the two parties prepared to embark.

 

Chompshi and Vrael, standing before Turaga Pelekua, both saluted the boisterous old Turaga. "Make Atemu proud, Pelekua," Chompshi said. "Rebuild this war-torn land, and tell future generations about the great events that occurred to bring freedom to Tai-Koro."

 

"That I will," nodded the Turaga of Rahi. "That I will."

 

Likewise, the Toa Septiu parted ways with the Toa Terra. Ausar, at the head of the group, seized Matoba's hand and pumped it furiously. "Matoba, it's been a pleasure! Until we meet again, keep up the good work. Make sure this rabble stays in line."

 

"You got it!" Matoba chortled at the Toa of Fate's joke. "The same to you, Ausar."

 

Auset, meanwhile, had enveloped Heaka in a mighty squeeze. "Oh, Heaka, have a safe trip! And take care of Matoba too."

 

"Naturally," Heaka replied, cuddling up against the somewhat-embarassed Toa of Fire. "Stay safe yourself, Auset. I trust that you will watch over Ausar as well."

 

Lyse, standing next to Heru, gave the Toa of Gravity a playful nudge on the shoulder. "Heru my friend, have plenty of good-times while we are gone. I'm glad to have found-met such a strong-brave Toa-hero as you."

 

"Just don't get into any trouble, Lyse," Heru admonished him with a wink. "But I too am honored to have known you."

 

As Attar, Nuukor, and Pacha said goodbye to Anpu, Nebt-het, and Sutekh, the Pe-Matoran and Vrael boarded Aritonu's galleon. Then, as the last of the Toa Terra climbed aboard their raft, both vessels set off, plowing through the roaring surf. Pelekua and the Matoran of Kemet Nui, watching their friends go, waved and cheered to send them off. As the sun sank below the horizon with an emerald flash, and the cloud-filled sky glowed in resplendent shades of pink and orange, both vessels could clearly be seen in the distance for some time. But then they too vanished from sight.

 

Once this had occurred, Ausar, wiping a tear from the corner of his eye, turned to Pelekua and slung his Kepesh over his shoulder. "Come on, Turaga. Let's go home."

 

But the Turaga of Rahi looked up at him with a twinkle in his eye. "Home, my boy? Home, you say? Well, then we are already there! For what is home but a place that you love, surrounded by your closest companions? That is the real definition of home."

 

"Kemet Nui is our home. True, the sun blazes strongly for one half of the year and relentlessly for the other half. True, the sandstorms are brutal, the humidity low, and water scarce. True, the beauty of this land is hard to appreciate. But it is a wonderful place nevertheless. And despite what we've heard of all the glories of Terra Nui, I wouldn't want to live anywhere else."

 

And Bast, in her innocent way, spoke for all of the Matoran with what could only be described as the last word.

 

"Yep. Pretty much."

 

------

 

The same day, a long line of footprints marked the slope of Terra Nui's Mount Tongaru, sunk deep into the powdery snow. Laboriously, Sharaku Hanak trudged his way up the icy mountain, heavy in carrying the lifeless body of Argentaros over his shoulders. Fearing harming the body, which was thin from the strain of the alpha Quntaino's final actions, Hanak had refrained from quickly ascending using his powers of acceleration, and hours passed as he journeyed to the summit. Now, he finally reached the peak, a flatter spot where Otasuva, shrine of the six keystones, which had become eggs of the Quntaino, had once stood in its multicolored glory.

 

Sighing in relief, Hanak bended down and softly lay Argentaros on the snow, and cast a look around as he caught his breath, his exhalations billowing away from him in a mist. By some trick of fate, the many shards of the Quntaino eggs still lay near the surface of the snow, only a thin sheen of transparent frost upon them. So much has happened since that fateful day I first came upon these pieces. Had I been told of what would occur after that, I wouldn't have believed a word, Hanak thought.

 

The red-armored Sharaku walked to the most level patch of snow he could find, and channeled a gout of fire into the snow, melting a crater three bio in diameter, and one bio deep. As the freezing air quickly refroze the puddle of water at its bottom, Hanak set out to gather up the many keystone shards in the vicinity, ranging fom small splinters to large plates nearly a bio large and deeply curved. All, however, were jagged on every edge, shattered as the beings within them were released. A few minutes dragged by as Hanak took every piece and transferred them to the opening in the icy ground he had created. Finally, he took Argentaros's body and laid it upon the bed of rainbow crystals, the Quntaino's white fur fanning out on them. Gently, Hanak brushed a coating of ice from the crystal eyes, translucent without the inner spark of life. For a brief moment, they reflected the light of the multitude of stars in the heavens above Terra Nui. Then, Hanak accelerated his body to dig up a pile of snow to fill in the grave, completing a mound upon it. Argentaros become interred in the earth of his beloved island, not but a few feet from where he and his brothers came into existence, ending where his life had begun.

 

------

 

After the solemn burial, Hanak calmly walked at a natural pace to another important site near the summit of Mount Tongaru — the cavern of the prophecy, where he and his friends had first become Sharaku, which had nonetheless seemed distant in more recent days. The familiar gust of heated air beat at Hanak's face as he entered, this time mindful of the now low ceiling. Glancing around, he saw that the large circular cave was returning to the state he had first seen in it, as the yellow gems were regrowing upon the walls, in small new crystals. Kneeling for ease, Hanak then looked to the carved tablet housing the prophecy, and once more read the latter half of its glowing characters.

 

Hearken now! Redemption brings

Healing down on shining wings.

Fighting death with claw and tooth

From darkness then shall come the truth,

Emerging from thunderous sound

Of the island's strength unbound.

The guardians shall leave at last

To find the forger of the mask.

And only six who shall remain

The little servants of those slain

Will lead the way and find the power

To save the land in darkest hour.

Yet in these desperate times will see

That not the greatest enemy

Will seal the treasure in a portal

Rendering keeper immortal.

Thus will begin a brighter morn,

Once again the balance reborn.

 

Now I understand, Hanak thought, The Quntaino were indeed not the enemy. In their sacrifices, they forever changed Terra Nui . . . Such strength, such love to give their lives for their homes. If only I knew such an affection for my homeland . . .

 

His mind awash in a current of thoughts, Hanak rose and left the cavern, meandering back to Argentaros's grave one final time. A soft snowfall had begun, lightly coating the mound.

 

They may have gone to Mata Nui yesterday on the plains, and their bodies vanished then, Hanak elegized, But the Quntaino — all seven — were really buried here tonight.

 

A tear fell from his eye, a freezing diamond which landed upon the snow.

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Chapter 29

 

With the Quntaino deceased, Argentaros buried, and the Mask of Nature forever fused to the now-invincible Shredder, life on Terra Nui returned to normal.

 

In the aftermath of the Second Battle of Terra Nui, the horde of Rahi that had formerly been under the Quntaino's mental influence had returned to their senses and observed their awkward position of trying to kill Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko whom they were not planning to eat. Thus returned to their natural states, the beasts had dispersed from Terra-Koro and returned to their homes, showing no signs of having ever been mind-controlled. The mother Ariakudo in particular made a majestic sight as she sightlessly plodded through the streets of the village and disappeared back into the Johmai Jungle. She was never seen again, and it would never be known whether she continued in her great longevity or eventually died from simply being so ancient.

 

As for Gorgorak and her army of Visorak, there was much reconciliation to be made. No longer blinded by the sheer charisma of Argentaros, the Queen had woefully admitted to the Green One how wrong she had been; and she and all her progeny had also told the Matoran, Bohrok, and Acko how sorry they were for staging the attack in the first place. The Green One, being a warmhearted and easily-forgiving little being, took the apology with grace. Hanak and the Sharaku, on the other hand, forgave the Visorak because they knew the spider Rahi would not attempt such a power grab again. Now that the Quntaino were gone, it was likely that no other harmful influences would surface on Terra Nui in the forseeable future. And so the Visorak, thus redeemed, helped the Matoran to rebuild the damaged parts of Terra-Koro, aided by the Necrovak, Aquavak, and Acko.

 

Days passed. Having been protected by the Sharaku during the struggle with the Quntaino, the villagers of Terra Nui were comforted in the fact that their island had its brave defenders, even though the Toa Terra had been gone for what seemed like an eternity. Though public memory had not forgotten the eight heroes and the wise Turaga, it seemed almost as though Akito and his company would never return. But then, three weeks after Argentaros's burial, something wonderful happened.

 

That morning, Machi and Brega were fishing quietly on an outcropping of rocks in the Suti Bay. Heaka's adventuresome brother had let Ikki pursue a meal in the low tidal waters, while the renowned shipwright had brought her tame Pikobe to join her and Machi. The jet-black wading bird was now helping Brega catch breakfast, prevented from swallowing the fish it snared by a string tied loosely around its throat.

 

Machi, his fishing rod slack from lack of Waiwa biting, had taken a moment to admire the beauty of the sunrise. Looking at the horizon, he thought of just how happy he would be to see his sister, the Toa of Water, again, as well as all her teammates and the leader of Terra-Koro. So caught up was he in his musings that Machi almost didn't notice the faint brown shape emerging on the edge of the horizon. But as it slowly drifted in the direction of the bay, the Ga-Matoran lazily turned to Brega and got her attention.

 

"Brega, the trading ships from Ceronox Nui have tall sails, don't they?"

 

The shipwright put down her fishing pole and scrutinized Machi with a puzzled expression. "They do. Why do you ask?"

 

"Oh, no reason. It's just that there's a sail-less boat near the horizon coming towards us, and I wanted to know what island it might be coming from, that's all."

 

Brega pulled a spyglass out of her rucksack and aimed it at the brown shape in the distance. But what she saw startled her so much that as soon as she observed it clearly, she began packing up her belongings hurriedly. With the fishing rod slung over her shoulder, she whistled at the Pikobe to get its attention, grabbed her basket of fish, and began running back toward Terra-Koro.

 

"What is it?" Machi asked. "Do I need to tell Wula to get her cart ready?"

 

"No, silly!" Brega exclaimed. "It's Turaga Akito and the Toa Terra! They have returned!"

 

------

 

Once Brega reached the village, word spread quickly about how the Turaga and Toa were back. Hanak and the Sharaku, along with the Green One, led the group of more than two hundred villagers to the shore where Machi and Brega had first spotted the raft. Most of the Matoran had been finishing their breakfast or just heading off to work when the call was sounded; a few had even been sleeping, and had to be woken up and brought out of their houses to greet the returning heroes. But after a few minutes, everyone was assembled, and so now Terra-Koro in its entirety stood on the northern shore, eagerly awaiting the raft.

 

There had not been a raft originally, Hanak recalled. The vessel that Turaga Akito and the Toa had used was an outrigger ship with large sails, which Akito had dubbed the Hakeahu. It was the vessel Akito had journeyed to Terra Nui with long ago, while he was still a Toa Sah, and had sat unused in a sea cave near the Suti Bay for centuries until the Turaga decided to sail to Kemet Nui with it. Now, however, it seemed as though the group was coming home on a raft. Which was fine with Hanak; presumably their ship ran into some trouble and was destroyed, and they had been forced to build a raft on which to return.

 

The Sharaku of Fire was still curious about one thing, however. Akito and the Toa Terra, believing that Kemet Nui would be at peace when they arrived, had asserted to the villagers that they would be gone only a few weeks. But now they had been gone for over a month. There were several possibilities for this: either the nine beings had been so caught up in visiting Kemet Nui that they had stayed longer than expected, or some unfortunate events had befallen them such that they needed to stay on Kemet Nui longer. Either way, Hanak was sure that Akito and the Toa Terra would bring back plenty of stories to tell — and the villagers would have plenty of stories to tell them.

 

It would have been nice, Hanak thought, if the Toa Terra had returned earlier than expected. He and his team would have welcomed their aid in fighting the Quntaino. Yet perhaps it was better that the voyagers had taken so long to come back. It was almost as if their expedition was fated to happen, as if Hanak and his team were meant to encounter the Quntaino by themselves, become Sharaku, and then prove their heroism by confronting the keystone-born. Such destiny was open to debate, but the Sharaku were sure that they had done well in defending Terra Nui. That story they were eager to tell.

 

As the raft neared the shoreline, it came to a stop in the placid surfline. However, to the astonished gasps of the villagers of Terra Nui, nine figures did not come ashore from the vessel to stand before them. Only seven did.

 

The younger Toa Terra were there, all six of them. Physically-speaking, each appeared to be fine, carrying their weapons as well as bags of now-spent provisions. Were one to look into the eyes of the Toa Terra, though, as they regarded their friends and family on the shore with happy if tired expressions, one would notice that something was different about them. The Toa had all matured somehow, it seemed, had seen and done things that few would ever dare in their lifetimes. These were no longer the six eager, inexperienced fighters chosen by Turaga Akito to be the new defenders of Terra Nui. They were now seasoned warriors.

 

After they had stepped forward, the Toa Terra moved aside so that the Matoran, Sharaku, and the Green One could see the last figure descending from the raft. It was indeed a Turaga, a red armored Turaga at that. But the figure was not Turaga Akito. It was Chompshi.

 

Where once he had been a lanky, commanding Toa of Electricity with a towering thunder stave and a powerful electric cannon, Chompshi had become a short and wizened elder garbed in yellow and crimson robes. His Kanohi Honiara was considerably smaller, his staff much shorter, and his cannon no longer with him. But the azure, compassionate eyes in his weather-beaten face were still the same ones that had looked upon Hanak with awe after the Torika had saved his life, and the calm smile was still the same one that had he had often given sternly to Matoran who had been caught engaging in mischief. Even if everything had changed around him, even his own body, Chompshi was still the same at heart. He was still a hero.

 

And, seeing six strange and unfamiliar beings before him and his six former students, the Turaga of Electricity was speechless. Matoba and his team likewise were stunned, having never expected to see their Torika friends metamorphose into tall and glorious Sharaku. They were just as surprised to see the Sharaku as the Sharaku were to see them. For a few moments, nobody said a word. But then Chompshi finally found his voice.

 

"Hanak?!" he asked.

 

"Chompshi?!"

 

Having recovered from his initial amazement, the Turaga Terra chuckled. Gazing up at the Sharaku of Fire, who now towered over him, he could not help but smile fondly at how the tables had turned since the once-little Torika had begged to stay on Terra Nui, forty years ago. "Now I know how you must have felt."

 

"What happened?" Hanak exclaimed, speaking for all of Terra-Koro. "Where's Vrael? Where's Turaga Akito?"

 

Chompshi's expression turned serious. "The Toa and I have many questions for you as well, Hanak. And we will answer yours, in due time. But enough of this gawking. Let us return to Terra-Koro. There I will explain everything."

 

------

 

So the villagers went back to the house of Turaga Akito, where Chompshi and the Toa Terra made themselves comfortable in the central living area. The Sharaku and the Green One likewise took up positions in the main room. Meanwhile, the Matoran assembled around the heroes, for unlike on Kemet Nui the village population actually could all fit into the Turaga's house. It was here, once everyone had sat down, that the stories would be told, starting with Hanak.

 

He began by describing how he had noticed the lightning strike on Mount Tongaru, and how he had journeyed to the summit to observe the broken-open remains of the keystones and Otasuva itself. At the time, he had decided it was nothing too out of the ordinary, and so had neglected to tell Turaga Akito or the Toa when the group was departing from Terra Nui. However, soon the Torika learned of the existence of six of the Quntaino. Hanak went into great detail about the appearance of Daigolva, Snimurai, Predacron, Carcarinax, Nosfernox, and Icrizahk. He also described Argentaros, even though the Quntaino leader hadn't in fact revealed himself until the Second Battle of Terra Nui.

 

But Hanak continued to describe all that the Quntaino had done, from the battles they had with the Torika — and the Sharaku once Hanak's team had transformed — to Carcarinax stealing information from the Turaga's house to the great surprise of the Green One. He told about the possessed Rahi attacks, the treachery of the Visorak, and finally, about the Cavern of the Prophecy and what had happened when the six Torika had journeyed there. Last of all, Hanak spoke of the final gift of the Quntaino that had resulted in their deaths, and also explained the seven creatures’ message: how the Matoran of Terra Nui had been spending the island's natural resources without much thought as to how harm their actions may cause, and how they had not appreciated the wondrous life of Terra Nui as much as they should have. Argentaros had told the Green One never to let the Matoran forget his message, and so the diminutive being had taken it upon himself to be steward of the flora and fauna of the island, and keep them protected and nourished until the end of his days.

 

Hanak, having thus finished, waited for Chompshi and the Toa Terra to respond. The Turaga of Electricity, having poured himself a cup of Madu juice from Akito's pantry, sat upright in his chair and addressed the Sharaku solemnly. "I had no idea such pivotal events were occuring while we were away. To be perfectly honest, I couldn’t have imagined that the lightning strike would have a repercussion like it did, helping to birth seven creatures that none of us had any idea existed as embryos inside the keystones! These Quntaino, when you first described them, did not strike me as intelligent or even kind-hearted beings, yet now I see that however they may have been perceived as villains, they were truly noble at heart. Argentaros himself must have been very wise, however perverse his endeavors were at first. And though the Quntaino's actions did cause undue suffering, mind-controlling Rahi or causing Mount Juvala to erupt, in the end they did achieve what they had so desired — peace for Terra Nui, and freedom from tyranny over nature."

 

"Thank you, Hanak, for stopping the Quntaino from destroying the Zlinj," Attar said, speaking for all of the Toa Terra. "Now we know the Mask of Nature is safe, tucked into old Shredder's maw for all eternity. To think that it had been around all along, carried in his gullet for these forty years! I'll bet Turaga Atemu would have cracked up at that one, hearing where it was after we lost it."

 

"Would have?" Rieka enquired gently. "I thought that this Turaga Atemu was still alive on Kemet Nui, last time you mentioned him. Yet you speak of him in the past tense. How can this be?"

 

The Toa Terra looked at Chompshi expectantly, and the Turaga Terra looked back at them sadly. Then he launched into his own narrative.

 

Compared to the Sharaku's story of events on Terra Nui, this saga was even more expansive, accounting for not just one adventure, but two. Chompshi started by describing the trip to the Kemet Nui dome, and how a terrible storm had forced the Hakeahu to crash prematurely on Punt Nui. Then, after Lyse had been temporarily spoken through by a mysterious voice, the expedition had found its way to Pe-Koro, where they met Senko and the Pe-Matoran, learned of the islanders' predicament, and vowed to help. On various trips through the Hyuli Forest and up to the Puntapau Plateau, the Toa Terra had run afoul of the six Vorukaia and legions of Vorukan, but in the end they succeeded in infiltrating Aso's Citadel, defeating Amun and his foul team, crippling Ballom, and removing Aso from the picture — or so they had thought. After Nuukor and Pacha had collapsed the huge fortress, the Vorukan had fled into the forest, never to be seen again, and Pe-Koro had been saved.

 

Chompshi continued to describe the company's journey to Kemet Nui and what transpired there, from the rescue of Tai-Koro to the final struggle in the Great Philae Temple.  "So it was," he concluded at long last, "that we stopped Apep and Aso. How the King of the Betshu was trapped, I have already spoken of. But Aso was defeated in a different manner. Vrael and I channeled our powers, and together, spending every last bit of Toa energy we had, imprisoned her in a cage of crystal and electricity, and he and I became Turaga as a result of that effort. However, we were too late for one thing — we could not save Khepera, who was trapped by Aso, and died with honor as we trapped her, in order that she might not escape. But he was not the only one. Atemu and Akito were slain too, the former by Aso's elemental blast, and the latter by a bolt of energy from Tekhtekh. We held a funeral for all three Turaga in Tai-Koro, but Akito was not buried there. His remains came home with us, so that he might be interred here, on the island he loved."

 

Matoba, being the strongest of the Toa Terra physically, had brought in the coffin containing Akito's body. Before the teary eyes of all the Matoran, Sharaku, and the Green One, he opened the lid to reveal the calm, undisturbed form of Akito inside, who looked for all the world as if he were only sleeping.

 

Many of the villagers started to cry. The Green One, who had been closer to the Terra Nui elder than most, wiped his nose with the back of his shield. "We's all gonna miss Tuwaga Akito, now dat he's gone. He was da gweatest being I evah knew," he told Chompshi sorrowfully.

 

"Yes," the Turaga of Electricity responded. "But Terra-Koro is not without an elder. Before he died, Akito left the leadership of the village in my hands. And by Mata Nui, I swear to all of you that I will carry on in Akito's stead, and be the best Turaga you could possibly have!"

 

The Matoran, though still sad, seemed calmed somewhat by this. Hanak, however, still had one more question.

 

"And Vrael?" he asked. "What became of him?"

 

"Vrael still lives, that is certain," Chompshi said. "He is in good health, and wishes all of you his love. But once he became a Turaga, he was approached by the Pe-Koro Captain of the Guard Whetar, and was asked to go back to Punt Nui and become the elder of that island. It was a hard choice for him, but in the end Vrael agreed. After all, Terra Nui has me to lead it, and Kemet Nui has Aritonu and Pelekua. Yet without Khepera, Punt Nui had no leader — until Vrael stepped in. Hopefully, he will find peace and happiness there."

 

For a few moments, everyone inside Turaga Akito's house was silent. Then, Chompshi took another drink, and looked around with a wry smile. "I guess," he sighed, "this is my home now. It will be strange, living in a house formally occupied by Akito and Hakeahu." He looked at his six pupils. "I'm sure you felt the same way when you became Toa Terra and had to adjust to your rebuilt, larger homes. I know Vrael and I did." Chompshi then turned to Hanak and the Sharaku. "And last, but certainly not least, now you have had that experience too, heroes of Terra Nui."

 

Hanak glanced at the other Sharaku, who returned his expression of embarassed modesty. Then the Sharaku of Fire addressed the Turaga Terra. However much satisfaction he felt internally at having brought peace to Terra Nui, his voice was filled with nothing but humility.

 

"Chompshi . . . Turaga Chompshi . . . we appreciate your encouragement. But my team and I are far from heroes. All we did was respond to a threat, one that unchecked would have spelled ruin for us all. Our actions were taken for the greater good, not because we were asked to perform them, but because we felt that they had to be done. We couldn't have just done nothing."

 

"You, on the other hand, are the heroes," Rieka spoke quietly. "Look at what you did on Punt Nui and Kemet Nui. You didn't have to be there. You could have declined the requests of Senko and Turaga Atemu. But you didn't. You decided to lend a hand to help those less fortunate for yourselves, because you had been given the power to do so. That is the true measure of a hero: selflessness. And that is why you Toa are the ones who deserve the title of 'hero'. Not us."

 

"Maybe so," Heaka kindly said. "Yet it is this very altruism that you attribute to us, which you yourselves have been graced with. You six Torika didn't have to help the Green One protect Terra Nui. This island hadn't been your home for very long. You weren't attached to it like we were. But you decided to help, because you knew it was right. And so, in this regard, you are just as much of heroes as we are. In fact, because you undertook this endeavor out of the kindness of your hearts, you are even greater heroes."

 

As Hanak and his teammates sat there in amazement, reflecting on what the wise Toa of Water had just said, Kavan suddenly burst out laughing.

 

"What is it, Kavan?" Vukaz asked.

 

"Oh, it's nothing," replied the Sharaku of Stone. "I was just thinking about something ironic. Remember that lie Argentaros used to dupe the Visorak, that the six of us were evil because all Sharaku were evil? Well, that got me thinking. Maybe we are heroes. Because you see, back at home, no Sharaku has ever done what we did. Our species has been neutral at best, and pure evil at worst, when the Dark Lord got his claws on some of our kind and twisted their hearts. So Heaka's right. She and her team were chosen to be heroes. But we chose to be heroes ourselves."

 

Vukaz nodded, agreeing with him. Zanta, equally satisfied, gave Hanak a thumbs-up, while Thukor's always-huge grin this time seemed to almost burst off his face. Rieka gave her team leader him a gentle pat on the shoulder. Finally, as the Sharaku of Fire turned back to the Turaga, he saw Chompshi's expression turn into a satisfied smile.

 

The Turaga of Electricity put down his cup, and set his staff against the arm of his chair. Then he stood, brought his callused hands together, and began to clap, which was slow at first but subsequently grew in loudness and intensity. Matoba and the Toa Terra too got up and clapped, eager to show the Sharaku their gratitude. The Green One joined in, and so did the Matoran. Before long, all of the villagers were applauding and cheering, shouting thanks and praise in a standing ovation for the beings who had delivered them from one of Terra Nui's darkest hours. And as this chorus of friends created a wonderful cacaphony around him, Hanak looked at his joyful teammates, and smiled back.

 

It was just as the Prophecy had foretold, he thought. Six heroes were chosen — another six awoke.

 

Then Chompshi, setting himself back down, picked up the cup, and raised a toast to the Sharaku. Taking a drink, he gazed again at Hanak with what he had always felt for the being who had saved his life — true kinship.

 

"Tell me again, Sharaku Hanak, how Argentaros died," insisted the elder of Terra Nui.

 

"Oh, I can do far more than that, Turaga Chompshi," came the glad response. "I will tell you how he lived."

 

 

Review

Link to comment
Share on other sites

Epilogue

 

Vrael stood at the prow of Turaga Aritonu's stately vessel, watching intently as the ship wound its way through the channel that separated the three parts of the isle of Punt Nui. He had been waiting for this moment for several days; Chompshi and the Toa Terra, whose raft had earlier been keeping pace with the ship, had already parted to take the longer route back to Terra Nui through the inter-dome sea tunnels. Now, all of Vrael's eager anticipation was about to be rewarded. Under the steady hand of the Turaga of Sonics at the tiller, the ship had come to a gentle stop on a red sand beach. Pe-Koro, Vrael knew, was on the cliff overlooking this point.

 

Whetar and the Punt Nui warriors, who had packed few belongings to begin with and had consumed most of their provisions on the journey, thanked Aritonu and the itinerant Kemet Nui Matoran who made up Aritonu's motley crew. Then they disembarked from the ship, going down the drawn gangplanks and forming a group on the sand. Though the carved stone steps and wooden ladders that led up to the village's promontory were less than a kio ahead of them, Whetar had the group wait for Vrael to join them. It was only proper, after all, to wait for their new Turaga.

 

Moving away from the ship's wheel, Aritonu joined the departing elder at the gangplank. "Take care, Vrael," said the Turaga of Sonics, smiling at him warmly. "This island is a good place, and I'm sure you will be happy here. I'd love to stay myself, but the sailors are restless, and we must head back to Kemet Nui shortly. Until our paths cross again, may Mata Nui watch over you." As he returned to his post, the silver elder suddenly remembered something, and turned back to Vrael one last time. "Oh, and another thing. Give Senko my regards. That old Matoran always did have a soft spot for the one who freed his mentor from imprisonment on Kush Nui."

 

Vrael nodded. "Sure, I'll do that. Goodbye, Aritonu, and thank you for everything." Satisfied, the Turaga of Crystal slowly made his way down the walkway and onto the sand. Reaching Whetar, he acknowledged the faithful warriors; and then the whole company, with Vrael at its head, began progressing up the stairs and ladders to Pe-Koro. The Punt Nui Matoran, eager to see their homes again, made small talk on the way up, but Vrael ascended wordlessly.

 

Once they had reached the top, Vrael was rewarded with the sight of the small but distinguished village. The arrangement of thatched huts was the same old vista that had greeted Akito and the Toa when the team had crashed on the island not so long ago; and the ten obelisks and the statue of the relaxed Toa Sah around the Amaja Circle hadn't seemed to have aged a day since Vrael had last set eyes upon them.

 

Ah, here it is, thought Vrael happily. Home at last.

 

Looking around, the Turaga Terra saw that the entire village had come out to greet his arrival and that of the warriors. Whetar and his soldiers dispersed behind Vrael, enthusiastically greeting their joyous families. But the rest of the villagers, who had been unaware of Vrael's transformation and vow to stay on Punt Nui, were equally hospitable. They had all remembered Vrael and the kindness he had shown them. Seeing him now, as a noble Turaga, they only viewed him in even more awe. So as Vrael reached the center of the village, they greeted him as they had greeted Khepera upon his return. As he made his way through the crowd congregating around him, some Matoran patted him on the shoulder or shook his worn hands. Others saluted or genuflected. A few even bowed.

 

Finally, at the entrance to the temple that both housed the great Suva and had served as the home of Turaga Khepera, stood Senko. The ancient Ko-Matoran Chronicler appeared as he always did, haggard yet determined, gripping his ceremonial staff and carved shield with the dignity that came from holding an important office. For a few moments, he was confused at the strange appearance of this blue and white new arrival. But then, as he finished scratching his worn Kanohi Rode, a look of recognition dawned in his faded, watery eyes.

 

"Vrael?" asked Senko amazedly.

 

"It is I," replied the Turaga Terra. "I have returned."

 

The implications of Vrael having become a Turaga had a profound effect on the old Matoran. What mattered to him was not how Vrael had become a Turaga, but why he was standing before Senko now, with not the former Turaga in sight. Visibly struggling to bring himself to utter the question, Senko finally whispered an inquiry he had been dreading to pose.

 

"Khepera . . . ?"

 

Vrael's face fell as he answered.

 

"He is dead."

 

Whetar and the warriors, having seen the ashes of Khepera in the electrically-charged crystal prison of Aso, looked down stoically out of sadness. The other villagers, unable to believe what they had just heard, could only wait to hear the explanation. Senko likewise could barely breathe. In order to dispel any qualms that his new neighbors might have, Vrael quickly launched into his narrative.

 

"It was Aso who killed him. Or, at least, who was planning on killing him. The Toa Septiu, Toa Terra, Chompshi, and I had her cornered in the Great Philae Temple in Tai-Koro. But the two Atukam were slipperier foes than we had thought; in one fell swoop, Apep mortally wounded Turaga Atemu and Aso did the same to Turaga Akito. However, as she prepared to strangle Khepera, the Turaga mentally told Chompshi that his life could be sacrificed if Aso were eternally captured. Thus Chompshi and I combined our powers, all of our powers, and created a matrix of crystal and lightning that incinerated Khepera and Aso's armored shell. To this day she lies in daily agony, trapped in a double Toa Seal with her mate Apep forever. And that is why I became a Turaga. Chompshi and I gave up our Toa energy so that the Scourges might be defeated."

 

Senko sighed. Though grief still showed on his face, he appeared at least somewhat comforted. "I knew, somehow, that Khepera had not survived. He came back from the dead once, but I feared he might not do so again. That fact brings great sorrow to me." Then his expression turned less melancholy and more hopeful. "Yet you should not fret, Vrael. I know how much you love Punt Nui. I could see it in your heart when you were here as a Toa. That is why I wish to tell you this: if only one of the Toa Terra could have returned here as a Turaga, I'm glad that it was you."

 

Smiling at Senko, Vrael put a conciliatory hand on the Chronicler's shoulder. "Thank you, my friend," Following this gesture, Vrael turned so that he could see all of the villagers of Punt Nui, and addressed them as a single body. "I shall do my best to lead you, my people. After much strife, we can now rejoice in the knowledge that our island has been freed of the shadow of tyranny. Apep and Aso are imprisoned, the Vorukan have fled, and the Citadel is no more. Now, Punt Nui can begin to heal."

 

To this, the Pe-Matoran responded with thunderous applause. But this uproar was soon joined by an even louder sound. Eager to see where it had come from, the villagers, Senko, and Vrael looked in the direction of the channel. There Aritonu's ship, having turned around to begin its journey home to Kemet Nui, had sounded its strident foghorn. As the Punt Nui Matoran waved jubilantly, the vessel slowly headed off toward open waters, disappearing into the fog after a few minutes.

 

"He wishes you his best regards, you know," Vrael told Senko. "Aritonu, I mean."

 

"I am glad to hear it," the old Matoran replied. "And you can thank him for me, if you see him again sometime. You see, Vrael, I don't have many years left. Try as you might to dispel this notion, it is true: my ancient lifespan is soon to come to a close. That was why, when Khepera was gone, I feared that I might die without leaving an heir to lead Punt Nui. But you, Turaga, are middle-aged. Not only will you be able to choose an heir when the time comes, but you will be able to lead Punt Nui for many millenia to come."

 

Vrael smiled warmly. He slung his arm over the Chronicler's shoulder, and together the two elders began heading towards the village temple. The Matoran, interested in hearing the story of Vrael's adventures on Kemet Nui, followed them as a group. But Vrael and Senko had already begun to converse jovially; their words could still be heard as the pair entered the grandiose building.

 

"Come on, Turaga," the old Chronicler could be heard saying. "I'll show you the places Khepera liked to spend his time. We could catch a bite to eat as well; I'm quite famished."

 

"Sounds good, Senko," Vrael announced. "Lead the way. After all, you shall teach me to become a great Turaga — just like my predecessor."

 

------

 

On Terra Nui, with the Toa returned and Chompshi in his rightful place as the new Turaga, everything was as it should be. The Matoran once again could be at peace, knowing their island would be safe and secure. At all future Festivals of Diamonds, they would again join their friends the Necrovak, Aquavak, Acko, and the Visorak in honoring the fallen heroes: Hakeahu, Turaga Akito, and the seven Quntaino. But the six Sharaku, while they had joined these hallowed ranks as saviors of Terra Nui, did not stay on the island forever. They knew that a greater destiny awaited them.

 

Thus Hanak and his five teammates found themselves on the plains outside Terra-Koro, traversing the windswept grassland for what would be the last time. They had packed all of their belongings and said all of their goodbyes. Though all of the villagers had been saddened to see them go, and the Green One especially so, all knew that it was for the greater good. And so the Sharaku now passed by herds of grazing Muudabok and tufted knolls of sparse grass, until they had reached the meeting point they had agreed upon, the designated landing strip.

 

As all six of them waited, a familiar matte gunmetal-grey airship descended from the heavens into view, sunlight gleaming off of its black accents. Large swaths of grass flattened beneath the pressure its engines generated, before the bounty hunter Chazok's craft The Inferno alighted on Terra Nui soil for the first time in forty years, coming to rest on hoverpads that rotated into treaded landing gear. Panels slid open on the rounded nose of the craft, and Chazok himself swaggered to the edge of the extended ramp. Flamethrower at his hip and his shoulder mounted chaingun still swiveling back and forth alertly, the bounty hunter hadn't changed a bit since the Sharaku had last seen him — although he appeared proportionally shorter in comparison to their new height.

 

Immediately upon seeing him, the five other Sharaku turned to face Hanak as one, each wearing an expression with a different degree of incredulity. "Chazok is our transport?" Zanta, who was the calmest of the group, asked with a raised eyebrow.

 

"My my, grown have we? Did we find some special mushrooms in the jungle?" Chazok smirked, still finding his jokes incomparably amusing, ignoring the five subordinate Sharaku.

 

In turn, Hanak similarly ignored Chazok's attempt at humor. "Well, since you arrived, you obviously received my message. You'll be willing to transport us to Shakaz then, in exchange?"

 

"I don't see why any rational being would wish to travel to that dump, but yes, if you wish. Come aboard, and we can complete the transaction," the bounty hunter remarked, greedily eyeing Hanak's luggage. "Thank you for flying with Chazok Airlines. Please keep your arms and legs inside the airship at all times. Mind the Bonecrusher — it's just had a new coat of paint."

 

Exchanging shrugs about what exchange was going on, the other Sharaku obediently followed Hanak into the metal corridors of The Inferno, as Chazok exaggeratedly gestured with his hands. The automated doorway from which all seven had entered quickly slid shut, and they followed the ambient glow of ceiling panels to the spacious hold, which contained the mentioned tank along with various parts and devices strewn over multiple tables.

 

"Now, before we go any further, I expect you to hand over the data," Chazok said keenly, holding out a hand. "Only once I verify that it is what you claim it is will we depart."

 

Hanak nodded, anticipating this, and reached into his largest sack of belongings to remove a single thin data disc and place it in the Skakdi's outstreched hand.

 

"Thank you." Chazok then walked a few paces down to a blank screen on the wall of the hold, inserting the disc into a slot near its bottom. The screen flared to life, and various icons appeared. Efficiently scrolling through the blocks of data, Chazok went through page after page of text, diagrams, and semantics, each of which had his own signature scrawled on the bottom.

 

"Argarak didn't even remove my name from it, the fool," he spat contemptuously. "Ah, but that's all ancient history now."

 

Having apparently seen enough to ascertain that the disk was genuine, Chazok quickly removed it from the slot and stashed it in some small pocket of his flight suit. "Sharaku, I will now fulfill my portion of our agreement — as soon as I also have in my posession the communication device you contacted me with."

 

"I can't refuse, I suppose," Hanak replied with a trace of humor, before also delivering the electronic communicator to Chazok.

 

"Also of Argarak's make, I see. Resourceful little one you were, salvaging all this from his laboratory," Chazok murmured. "Don't mind that I'm taking this," he continued. "It's not that I don't trust you — I just don't trust that this will remain out of theiving hands once in Shakaz. And believe me, I'm sure there are quite a few souls there who still want me quite dead. I don't see how anyone could have a grievance against a fine, upstanding citizen such as myself, but we live in a strange universe. Again, as I have said before, nothing personal."

 

"I now leave you to your own devices. Don't break anything you can't pay for. And I assure you, that's everything." With these parting words, noticing that the Sharaku were already sitting down on several of the work tables, Chazok strode to the far corner of the hold, nimbly climbing a small protosteel ladder into the transparent, azure, glasslike cockpit dome. Sliding into the pilot's chair, he sighed contentedly, expertly maneuvering the complicated controls to ease The Inferno up from the flattened prarie grass.

 

After a moment more of mechanical adjustments, he suddenly paused to speak.

 

"Oh Hanak? That is your name, or a similar permutation, if I recall correctly. Why did you follow me to the cockpit?" Chazok queried, without turning his head.

 

The crimson-armored Sharaku, who had slid into lounging in an unoccupied chair behind the bounty hunter on the other edge of the spacious cockpit, shrugged. "I wish to see Terra Nui one last time, and this area has the only windows."

 

"I'm afraid my timetable only allows for a short look," Chazok replied. Expertly controlling the airship, he twirled a set of controlls to execute a flawless midair pivot, then gunned the accelerator pad to rocket the craft toward the nearest exit of Terra Nui's dome. As the powerful engines pulsed and spouted flame, Hanak accelerated himself to take one last look upon the beautiful isle of Terra Nui. As fate had it, the Collosorahk Shredder had just burrowed to the surface near The Inferno's momentary landing site, drawn by the sonic vibrations the ship had produced. It turned its thin eyes, blazing vermillion eyes like Argentaros's, toward Hanak for one brief moment, and opened its maw wide in exhaling a fiery breath, offering a last view of the brilliant Zlinj. Then even Hanak's power could not slow events down fast enough, and the island forever receded in a blur. Satisfied, the Sharaku relaxed back in his chair.

 

Around the Matoran Universe, empires might rise and fall, but on Terra Nui the Zlinj, Legendary Mask of Nature, would turn its face to the universe and endure.

 

The End

 

 

Review

Edited by Ballom
Link to comment
Share on other sites

Join the conversation

You can post now and register later. If you have an account, sign in now to post with your account.
Note: Your post will require moderator approval before it will be visible.

Guest
Reply to this topic...

×   Pasted as rich text.   Paste as plain text instead

  Only 75 emoji are allowed.

×   Your link has been automatically embedded.   Display as a link instead

×   Your previous content has been restored.   Clear editor

×   You cannot paste images directly. Upload or insert images from URL.

×
×
  • Create New...